JP2017086121A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of easily specifying a position of a displacement member.SOLUTION: A first irregular reflection part 353d of a winning member 353 and a second irregular reflection part 354b of a decoration member 354 are so disposed as to differentiate distances thereof from a light-emitting member 355. This configuration can differentiate light diffusion modes of an LED 355a transmitting through the first irregular reflection part 353d and the second irregular reflection part 354b between the first irregular reflection part 353d and the second irregular reflection part 354b. A variable plate 352 is disposed on a light transmission side of the second irregular reflection part 354b, so that a player can recognize the variable plate 352 disposed on the light transmission side by light/dark of the light.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 31

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a gaming machine is known that includes a displacement member that is disposed so as to be displaceable at a position that can be visually recognized by a player and that switches a flow path of a game ball in accordance with the displacement position (Patent Document 1) ).

JP-A-8-131612

  However, the above-described gaming machine has a problem that it is difficult for the player to specify the position of the displacement member.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that makes it easy for a player to specify the position of a displacement member.

  In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 is provided with a displacement member that is disposed so as to be displaceable at a position that can be visually recognized by the player and that switches the flow path of the game ball in accordance with the displacement position. A substrate member on which one or a plurality of light emitting means formed so as to emit light is mounted with the light emitting surface facing the front side, and a first member formed of a light transmitting material disposed on the front side of the substrate member. A transmissive member and a second transmissive member, wherein the displacement member is formed of a light transmissive material and is disposed on the front side of the second transmissive member, between the second transmissive member and the substrate member. The distance is set to a distance different from the distance between the first transmission member and the substrate member.

  The gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the first transmitting member and the second transmitting member are provided with irregularities on at least one of a front surface and a back surface.

  The gaming machine according to claim 3 is the gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein the unevenness formed on the first transmitting member and the unevenness formed on the second transmitting member are substantially the same.

  According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, it is possible to easily allow the player to specify the position of the displacement member.

  According to the gaming machine of the second aspect, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine of the first aspect, the difference in the mode of light can be made larger.

  According to the gaming machine according to claim 3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine according to claim 2, it is possible to enhance the effect.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of a game board. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a game board. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a game board. It is a front view of a movable entrance ball accessory apparatus. It is a rear view of a movable entrance ball accessory apparatus. It is a perspective view of the movable entrance ball apparatus front view. It is a back perspective view of a movable entrance ball accessory apparatus. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a movable entrance ball accessory apparatus. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a movable entrance ball accessory device. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a center frame. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a center frame. (A) to (c) is a partially enlarged rear view of the center frame. (A) to (c) is a partially enlarged front view of the center frame. (A) is the partial enlarged front view of the center frame in a 1st state, (b) is the partial enlarged front view of the center frame in a 3rd state. (A) is a front view of an intermediate member, (b) is a rear view of the intermediate member, and (c) is a cross-sectional view of the intermediate member taken along line XIXc-XIXc in FIG. 19 (a). FIG. 20A is an exploded front perspective view of the intermediate member, and FIG. 20B is an exploded rear perspective view of the intermediate member. (A) is a front view of a center frame and an intermediate member, (b) is a side view of the center frame and the intermediate member, and (c) is a center frame taken along line XXIc-XXIc in FIG. It is a partial expanded sectional view of an intermediate member. (A) to (c) is a front view of the center frame and the intermediate member. (A) to (c) is a partial enlarged cross-sectional view of the center frame and the intermediate member. (A) to (c) is a cross-sectional view of the center frame and the intermediate member. (A) is a front view of a rear member, (b) is a rear view of the rear member, and (c) is a cross-sectional view of the rear member taken along line XXVc-XXVc in FIG. 25 (a). It is a disassembled front perspective view of a back member. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a rear member. (A)-(c) is sectional drawing of the back member in the XXVIII-XXVIII line | wire of FIG. (A) to (c) is a cross-sectional view of the rear member. (A) is a front view of an intermediate member and a back member, (b) is a side view of an intermediate member and a back member. (A) is sectional drawing of the intermediate member and back member in the XXXIAa-XXXIAa line | wire of Fig.30 (a), (b) is sectional drawing of the intermediate member and posterior member in the XXXIb-XXXIb line | wire of FIG.30 (b). FIG. It is sectional drawing of an intermediate member and a back member. It is sectional drawing of an intermediate member and a back member. It is sectional drawing of an intermediate member and a back member. It is sectional drawing of an intermediate member and a back member. It is sectional drawing of an intermediate member and a back member. It is sectional drawing of an intermediate member and a back member. It is sectional drawing of an intermediate member and a back member. It is sectional drawing of an intermediate member and a back member. It is sectional drawing of an intermediate member and a back member. It is sectional drawing of an intermediate member and a back member. It is sectional drawing of an intermediate member and a back member. It is sectional drawing of an intermediate member and a back member. It is sectional drawing of an intermediate member and a back member. It is sectional drawing of an intermediate member and a back member. It is sectional drawing of an intermediate member and a back member. It is sectional drawing of an intermediate member and a back member. It is sectional drawing of an intermediate member and a back member. It is sectional drawing of an intermediate member and a back member. It is sectional drawing of an intermediate member and a back member. It is sectional drawing of an intermediate member and a back member. (A) is a front view of a back surface base, (b) is a side view of a back surface base. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a back surface base. It is an exploded back perspective view of a back base. (A) to (c) are cross-sectional views of the back surface base taken along line LV-LV in FIG. (A) is a front view of a variable unit, (b) is a top view of a variable unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of the main-body part of a variable unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of the main body of the variable unit. It is a top view of a distribution part. It is a top view of a distribution part. It is a top view of a distribution part. It is a top view of a variable unit. It is a top view of a variable unit. It is a top view of a variable unit. (A) to (c) is a top view of the variable unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of the round transfer ball part of a variable unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of the round transfer ball portion of the variable unit. (A) is a side view of the rotator, (b) is a top view of the rotator, and (c) is a cross-sectional view of the rotator along the line LXVIIIc-LXVIIIc in FIG. 68 (b), (D) is sectional drawing of the rotary body in the LXVIIId-LXVIIId line | wire of FIG.68 (b). (A)-(c) is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of the displacement unit in the LXIX-LXIX line | wire of Fig.56 (a). (A) to (c) is a partial top view of the displacement unit. (A) is a front view of a variable unit and a back surface base, (b) is a top view of a variable unit and a back surface base. (A) to (c) is a top view of the variable unit and the back base. (A)-(c) is sectional drawing of the variable unit and back surface base in the LXXIII-LXXIII line | wire of Fig.72 (a). (A)-(c) is sectional drawing of the variable unit and back surface base in the LXXIV-LXXIV line | wire of FIG.71 (b). (A) is sectional drawing of the variable unit and back surface base in the state before a stopper part is displaced, (b) is sectional drawing of the variable unit and back surface base in the state after a stopper part is displaced. It is a top view of a variable unit and a back base. It is a top view of a variable unit and a back base. It is a top view of a variable unit and a back base. (A) to (c) are cross-sectional views of the variable unit and the rear base. It is sectional drawing of a variable unit and a back base. (A) is a front view of a winning opening unit, (b) is a rear view of the winning unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a winning opening unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a winning opening unit. (A) is a front view of a variable prize apparatus, (b) is a top view of a variable prize apparatus. (A) is an exploded front perspective view of the variable winning device, and (b) is an exploded rear perspective view of the variable winning device. (A) is a front view of a winning opening unit, and (b) is a top view of the winning port unit. (A) And (b) is a partial front view of a winning opening unit in the range LXXXVII of FIG. (A) is a top view of the winning opening unit, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit along line LXXXVIIIb-LXXXVIIIb in FIG. 88 (a), and FIG. 88 (c) is a view in FIG. It is sectional drawing of the winning a prize opening unit in the LXXXVIIIc-LXXXVIIIc line | wire of (). (A) to (c) is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit. (A) to (c) is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit. (A) is a front view of the variable unit in 2nd Embodiment, (b) is a top view of a variable unit, (c) is the variable unit in the XCIc-XCIc line | wire of FIG.91 (b). It is sectional drawing. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a variable unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a variable unit. (A) is a front view of a magnet, (b) is a top view of the magnet, and (c) is a side view of the magnet. (A) to (c) is a top view of the variable unit. 95A is a schematic cross-sectional view of the variable unit 2360 along the line XCVIa-XCVIa in FIG. 95A, and FIG. 95B is a schematic cross-sectional view of the variable unit along the line XCVIb-XCVIb in FIG. (C) is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of the variable unit taken along line XCVIc-XCVIc in FIG. 95 (c). (A) is a side view of the rotary body in 3rd Embodiment, (b) is a top view of a rotary body, (c) is sectional drawing in the XCVIIc-XCVIIc line | wire of FIG.97 (b). FIG. 97 (d) is a sectional view taken along line XCVIId-XCVIId in FIG. 97 (b). (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of a variable unit. (A) is a side view of the rotator in the fourth embodiment, (b) is a top view of the rotator, and (c) is a view of the rotator along the XCIXc-XCIXc line in FIG. 99 (b). It is sectional drawing, (d) is sectional drawing of the rotary body in the XCIXd-XCIXd line | wire of FIG.99 (b). It is sectional drawing of a variable unit and a back base. It is sectional drawing of a variable unit and a back base. It is sectional drawing of a variable unit and a back base. It is a disassembled perspective front view of the rotary body in 5th Embodiment. (A) is a side view of the rotator, (b) is a top view of the rotator, and (c) is a cross-sectional view of the rotator along the line CIVc-CIVc in FIG. 104 (b). (D) is sectional drawing of the rotary body in the CIVd-CIVd line | wire of FIG.104 (b). It is sectional drawing of a variable unit and a back base. It is sectional drawing of a variable unit and a back base. (A) is a front view of a prize opening unit in a 6th embodiment, and (b) is a rear view of a prize opening unit. It is a disassembled perspective front view of a winning opening unit. It is a front view of a prize mouth unit in a 7th embodiment. It is a disassembled perspective front view of a winning opening unit. (A) to (c) are cross-sectional views of the winning opening unit along the line CXI-CXI in FIG. It is a disassembled perspective front view of a prize opening unit in an 8th embodiment. (A) is a front view of a path | route member, (b) is sectional drawing of the path | route member in the CXIIIb-CXIIIb line | wire of Fig.113 (a). (A) is a front view of a path | route member, (b) is sectional drawing of a path | route member. (A) is a front view of a path | route member, (b) is sectional drawing of a path | route member. (A) is a front view of a path | route member, (b) is sectional drawing of a path | route member. It is a front view of a prize mouth unit in a 9th embodiment. It is a disassembled perspective front view of a winning opening unit. (A) And (b) is a front view of a path | route member. (A) And (b) is a front view of a path | route member. (A) And (b) is a front view of a winning opening unit. (A) And (b) is a front view of a winning opening unit. (A) is a top view of the path switching member according to the tenth embodiment, (b) is a front view of the path switching member, and (c) is an exploded perspective front view of the path switching member. (A) is a top view of a path switching member and each path, (b) is a side view of the path switching member and each path in the direction of arrow CXXIVb in FIG. 124 (a), (c), It is a side view of the path | route switching member and each path | route in arrow CXXIVc direction view of Fig.124 (a). (A) is a top view of a path | route switching member and each path | route, (b) is a side view of a path | route switching member and each path | route. (A) is a top view of a path | route switching member and each path | route, (b) is a side view of a path | route switching member and each path | route. (A) is a top view of a path | route switching member and each path | route, (b) is a side view of a path | route switching member and each path | route. (A) is a top view of a path | route switching member and each path | route, (b) is a side view of a path | route switching member and each path | route. (A) is a top view of a path | route switching member and each path | route, (b) is a side view of a path | route switching member and each path | route. (A) is a top view of a path | route switching member and each path | route, (b) is a side view of a path | route switching member and each path | route. It is a front view of a prize mouth unit in an 11th embodiment. It is a disassembled perspective front view of a winning opening unit. It is a disassembled perspective rear view of a winning opening unit. (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the winning opening unit in the CXXXIV-CXXXIV line of FIG. (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of a winning opening unit. (A) and (c) are sectional drawings of a prize mouth unit. (A) is a time chart which shows the time change of the displacement amount of a variable plate, (b) is a time chart which shows the time change of the displacement amount of the variable plate in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a side view of the rotator, (b) is a top view of the rotator, and (c) is a cross-sectional view of the rotator along the line CXXXVIIIc-CXXXVIIIc in FIG. 138 (b). (D) is sectional drawing of the rotary body in the CXXXVIIId-CXXXVIIId line | wire of FIG.138 (b).

  Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIG. 1 to FIG. 90, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described as a first embodiment. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer shape that is substantially the same as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 26, 27, 28, 63 and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball ball game is played when a ball (game ball) flows down the front of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 guides a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a game ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A firing rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the front upper side and a lower dish unit 15 that covers the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. 14 and the lower pan unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is an assembly of decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and a window part 14c that is formed in an approximately elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central part thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 that stores balls is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes to the front side and opens the upper surface, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the game ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4). A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. This frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device (not shown) or changing the content of the effect of super reach. .

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the periphery (for example, a corner portion). These light-emitting means play a role of enhancing the effect of the game during the game by changing or controlling the light-emitting mode by turning on or flashing according to the change in the gaming state at the time of big hit or predetermined reach. On the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 incorporating light emitting means such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 10, these lighting parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and the lighting parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking of the built-in LEDs at the time of jackpot or reach effects. Alternatively, it flashes to notify that the jackpot is being hit or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and can display when a prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs.

  In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back surface side so that the back surface side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, on the lower side of the right illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front surface of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin that is chrome-plated is attached to an area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state where a bill or a card is inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) disposed on the side of the pachinko machine 10, a game ball is operated according to the operation. Is lent out. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining amount as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. In addition, in a pachinko machine in which game balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit A decorative seal or the like may be added to the 40 installed portions so that the component configuration is common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower tray unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing game balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box shape having an open upper surface. ing. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 that is operated by a player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13 is disposed.

  Inside the operation handle 51, there are a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball launch unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the game ball during the pressing operation, and the operation handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of rotation operation (rotation position) based on a change in electrical resistance is incorporated. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation. The resistance value of the variable resistor The game ball is fired at a strength (launch strength) corresponding to the game ball, and the game ball is driven in front of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

  In the lower part of the front of the lower plate 50, a ball removal lever 52 is provided for operation when the game balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. The ball removal lever 52 is always urged in the right direction. By sliding the ball release lever 52 in the left direction against the urge, the bottom opening formed in the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A game ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball pulling lever 52 is normally performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as “a thousand box”) for receiving the game balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a plurality of nails (not shown) for ball guidance, a windmill, rails 61, 62, A general winning opening 63, a relatively large movable winning combination device 300, a left starting winning opening 26 provided at a lower left position of the movable incoming combination device 300, and a middle starting winning arrangement provided at a central position. The opening 28 is provided with a right start winning opening 27 disposed at a lower right position, and the peripheral edge thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1).

  The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures disposed on the rear surface side of the base plate 60 from the front side.

  The general winning port 63, the left starting winning port 26, the right starting winning port 27, the middle starting winning port 28, and the movable winning ball accessory device 300 are arranged in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. It is fixed from the front side of the panel 13 with a tapping screw or the like.

  The game balls thrown into the game area randomly enter the normal winning opening 63, or enter the left starting winning opening 26, the middle starting winning opening 28 or the right starting winning opening 27 in the process of flowing down. Or enter the movable ball accessory device 300 during operation (when opened).

  The game balls that have entered the winning holes are collected to the back side of the game board 13 through through holes formed in the game board 13.

  On the other hand, the game balls that have flowed into the movable entrance ball apparatus 300 are further discharged through a process of flow, rolling, and rising, and then collected and collected to the back of the game board 13. The In addition, the sorting operation in the movable ball accessory device 300 will be described later with reference to another drawing.

  The movable ball accessory device 300 is a case where a specific condition is satisfied (for example, when a game ball enters the left start winning port 26, the middle start winning port 28, or the right start winning port 27, The special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of a small hit) and allows the inflow of game balls. That is, the movable ball accessory device 300 has a wing 312 (so-called wing member) provided at an upper position of the game area, and the wing 312 uses, for example, a solenoid 317 (see FIG. 14). By the function of the link mechanism, it reciprocates by a predetermined angle along the board surface.

  The wing 312 is in a substantially upright state, and the inflow of the game ball into the movable incoming ball accessory device 300 is always impossible. When the movable ball accessory device 300 is actuated, the wing portion 312 is displaced so as to fall in the left-right direction within the game area around the base end portion thereof, so that the game ball flows into the movable ball accessory device 300. Enable. Since the wing 312 is near the upper position in the game area, in particular, near the position where the game ball is first driven, the game ball that is driven into the game area when the movable ball accessory device 300 is operated is The wings 312 are easily guided by the nails and are guided to the wings 312 and flow into the movable ball accessory device 300 as they are.

  The movable incoming ball accessory device 300 operates even when a prescribed condition is satisfied (when a game ball passes through any specific area provided in the movable incoming ball accessory device 300). It is possible to enter the entrance game apparatus 300. In addition, the specific area | region in the movable entrance ball accessory apparatus 300 is further mentioned later.

  Further, a variable plate 352 (see FIG. 12), which will be described later, is disposed in the movable incoming ball accessory device 300. The variable plate 352 performs a sorting operation for guiding the game ball to the normal route or the special route. If the game ball is guided to the normal route, the probability of a big hit after that is low, but if the game ball is guided to the special route, it will be a big hit after that compared to the case where the game ball is guided to the normal route. The probability of becoming higher.

  The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and the band-shaped metal plate is located on the inner side of the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is an area formed in front of the game board 13 and defined by the two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (a winning opening is provided and fired). Area where game balls flow down).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the game balls launched from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the front end portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2), and the game ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 returns to the ball guide passage again. Is prevented. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the ball, and the game ball launched at a predetermined momentum or more hits the return rubber 69, It is bounced back to the center while the momentum is attenuated.

  First symbol display devices 37A and 37B each having a plurality of LEDs and a 7-segment display as light emitting means are disposed in the lower left portion of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left portion in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be selectively used depending on whether the ball has won the left and right start winning ports 26 and 27 or the middle start winning port 28. . Specifically, when the ball has won the left and right start winning ports 26 and 27, the first symbol display device 37A is operated, while when the ball has won the middle start winning port 28, The first symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

  In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B indicate by LED whether the pachinko machine 10 is short-running or normal, by a lighting state, whether it is changing, by a lighting state, Whether the symbol corresponds to a small hit is indicated by a lighting state, the number of held balls is indicated by a lighting state, and the number of rounds or a big hit is displayed by a 7-segment display device. The plurality of LEDs are configured so that each LED has a different emission color (for example, red, green, and blue), and the combination of the emission colors may suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

  In the present pachinko machine 10, a lottery (lottery of whether or not a game ball flowing down the movable pitching accessory device 300 passes through a specific area) is performed in response to the winning of the first sensor 311b. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and also determines the type of the big hit if it is determined to be a big hit. The jackpot types determined here are 16R jackpot, 7R jackpot, and 3R jackpot. In the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, in the case of a jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is displayed.

  Here, “16R jackpot” means a jackpot of 16 rounds, “7R jackpot” means a jackpot of seven rounds, and “3R jackpot” The maximum number of rounds is a big hit of 3 rounds.

  One round is a unit for dividing the number of winning balls. In the present embodiment, during one round, the wing part 312 tilts and the first sensor 311b (see FIG. 14) is released, and when 30 seconds have passed or 10 game balls have passed the first sensor 311b, the process ends. It becomes. Since there are ten prize balls by passing one game ball through the first sensor 311b, about 100 prize balls can be obtained for each round.

  In the present embodiment, the first round ends when the game ball passes the V winning member 382 (see FIG. 10), and therefore the first round has no prize ball. In other words, a maximum of about 200 prize balls can be obtained for 3R jackpots, a maximum of about 600 prize balls for 7R jackpots, and a maximum of about 1500 prize balls for 16R jackpots.

  The short time state (short time) means a game state in which it is easy to win a game ball to the middle start winning opening 28 with the jackpot probability as it is and only the second pattern hit probability is increased. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state, the game is not in a short time (a state in which the probability of winning the second symbol is not increased).

  During the time reduction, not only does the probability of winning the second symbol increase, but also the time for opening the variable plate 652 of the variable winning device 650 associated with the middle start winning opening 28 is changed, which is longer than normal. Is set. When the variable plate 652 of the variable prize winning device 650 is in the opened state (open state), compared to the case where the variable plate 652 of the variable prize winning device 650 is in the closed state (closed state), the middle start It becomes easy for the game ball to enter the winning opening 28. Therefore, during the short time, it becomes easy for the game ball to win the middle start winning opening 28, and the wings 312 can be easily opened.

  It should be noted that, in the short time, instead of changing the opening time of the variable plate 652 of the variable winning device 650 associated with the middle start winning opening 28, or in addition to changing the opening time, per hit It is also possible to change the number of times that the variable plate 652 of the variable winning device 650 is opened more than usual. In addition, during the time saving, the winning probability of the second symbol is not changed, and the variable winning device 650 is variable at the time when the variable plate 652 of the variable winning device 650 associated with the middle start winning port 28 is opened and once. At least one of the number of times the plate 652 is opened may be changed. In addition, the time during which the variable plate 652 of the variable winning device 650 associated with the middle start winning port 28 is opened and the number of times the variable plate 652 of the variable winning device 650 is opened per time are not changed during the short time. , Only the probability of hitting the second symbol may be changed so as to increase compared to the normal probability.

  The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning holes 63 through which 5 to 15 game balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In addition, a movable ball accessory device 300 is disposed at the center of the game area. In the movable ball accessory device 300, the winnings (starting winnings) at the left and right starting winning ports 26 and 27 and the middle starting winning port 28 are used as a trigger while synchronizing with the variation display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. A wing portion 312 that opens and closes and a second symbol display device (not shown) configured by LEDs that variably display the second symbol triggered by the passage of a game ball through the through gate 67 are provided. Moreover, the center frame 86 is arrange | positioned so that the outer periphery of movable movable accessory device 300 may be enclosed.

  Each time the sphere passes through the through gate 67, the second symbol display device alternately turns on the symbol “◯” and the symbol “X” as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined time. A variable display is performed. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if the winning symbol is a winning symbol, the symbol “◯” is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation of the second symbol is displayed. Further, if the winning lottery results, the symbol of “x” is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation of the second symbol is displayed.

  When the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, the symbol “◯”), the pachinko machine 10 has a variable plate of the variable winning device 650 attached to the middle start winning port 28. 652 is configured to be activated (opened) for a predetermined time.

  The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter in the shorter time than in the normal gaming state. As a result, during the time reduction, since the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, the winning lottery can be performed more than during normal time. Therefore, since the chances for winning in the winning lottery increase, the player can be given many opportunities to open the variable plate 652 of the variable winning device 650 of the middle start winning opening 28. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the game ball to win the middle start winning opening 28 during the short time.

  It should be noted that the game ball can be moved to the middle start winning opening 28 during the time reduction by increasing the probability of winning during the time reduction or increasing the opening time or the number of times of opening of the variable plate 652 of the variable winning device 650 per time. When it is in a state where it is easy to win a prize, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required to display the variation of the second symbol is set to be shorter than normal during the time reduction, the winning probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, and the variable winning for one hit The opening time and the number of opening times of the variable plate 652 of the device 650 may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

  The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board on the left and right sides of the movable ball accessory device 300 so that a part of the game ball launched on the game board can pass therethrough. When the game ball passes through the through gate 67, a lottery for the second symbol is performed. After winning the lottery, the 2nd symbol display device displays a variation, and if the winning lottery results, the symbol “○” is displayed as the variable display stop symbol, and the winning lottery result may be off For example, the symbol “x” is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display.

  The total number of passes through the through-gate 67 of the sphere is held up to a maximum of 4 times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-described first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and at the second symbol hold lamp (not shown). Is also displayed. Four second pattern reservation lamps are provided corresponding to the maximum number of reservations, and are arranged symmetrically below the movable incoming ball accessory device 300.

  In addition, the variation display of the second symbol is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the movable input. A part of the ball accessory device 300 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the movable ball accessory device 300. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls with respect to the passage of the game ball of the through gate 67 is not limited to four times, and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). Further, the number of through gates 67 to be assembled is not limited to one, and may be plural (for example, two). Moreover, the assembly position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the left and right sides of the movable incoming ball accessory device 300, and may be, for example, above the movable incoming ball accessory device 300. In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol hold lamp may not perform lighting display.

  Left and right starting winning holes 26 and 27 through which a ball can win are arranged at the lower left and right of the movable ball accessory device 300. When a game ball wins the left and right start winning ports 26 and 27, the left start winning port switch 210a and the right start winning port switch 210b provided on the back side of the game board 13 are turned on, and the left start winning port switch 210a and right start are turned on. A lottery is made in the main controller 110 (see FIG. 4) due to the turn-on of the prize opening switch 210b, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown in the first symbol display device 37A, and the wing part 312 is displayed a predetermined number of times ( It is opened once in this embodiment, and is closed after a predetermined period (0.5 seconds in this embodiment).

  On the other hand, a middle start winning opening 28 through which a ball can win is disposed on the center side of the left and right starting winning openings 26 and 27 as viewed from the front. When a game ball wins the middle start winning opening 28, a middle start winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control is caused by the turning on of the start winning opening switch. A lottery is made by the device 110 (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37B, and the wing 312 is opened and closed a predetermined number of times (in this embodiment, twice). Repeat (open period is 0.5 seconds, interval between first and second is 2 seconds).

  Each start winning opening 26, 27, 28 is drawn in a lottery so that the winning prize is 1/1. Therefore, in this embodiment, there is no jackpot lottery due to the game balls passing through the start winning holes 26, 27, 28. After the lottery, the wing 312 repeats opening and closing a predetermined number of times after a randomly selected opening period (1 to 5 seconds).

  Each of the left and right start winning ports 26 and 27 and the middle start winning port 28 is also one of the winning ports from which five game balls are paid out as winning balls when a ball is won. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls to be paid out when a game ball wins the left and right start winning holes 26 and 27 is the same as the number of prize balls to be paid out when a game ball wins the middle start prize opening 28. However, the number of prize balls to be paid out when a game ball is won at the left and right start winning openings 26 and 27 is different from the number of prize balls to be paid out when a game ball is won at the middle start prize opening 28, for example, The number of prize balls to be paid out when a game ball is won at the left and right start winning openings 26 and 27 is three, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a game ball is won at the middle start prize opening 28 is five. May be.

  A variable winning device 650 is attached to the middle start winning opening 28. The variable plate 652 of the variable winning device 650 is configured to be openable and closable. Normally, the variable plate 652 of the variable winning device 650 is in a closed state (reduced state), and it is difficult for the ball to win the middle start winning port 28. It is in a state. On the other hand, when the symbol “◯” is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol that is triggered by the passing of the game ball to the through gate 67, the variable plate 652 of the variable winning device 650 is displayed. Is in an open state (enlarged state), and the ball is in a state where it is easy to win the middle start winning opening 28.

  As described above, during the time reduction, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than during normal time, and the time required for displaying the variation of the second symbol is also short. Is easily displayed, and the number of times that the variable plate 652 of the variable winning device 650 is opened (enlarged state) is increased. Further, during the time reduction, the time for which the variable plate 652 of the variable prize winning device 650 is opened is also longer than normal. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the game ball is more likely to win the middle start winning opening 28 during the shorter time than in the normal time.

  The probability of a 16R jackpot as the type of jackpot selected when the jackpot is won is greater when the game ball wins the middle start winning opening 28 than when the game ball wins the left and right start winning slots 26, 27. It is set high (a plurality of game balls can be made to enter the movable entrance ball apparatus 300 easily). On the other hand, the left and right start winning ports 26 and 27 do not have the electric combination as in the middle start winning port 28, and the ball can always win.

  A first sensor 311 b is disposed on the upper part of the movable ball accessory device 300. In the pachinko machine 10, the game ball that has entered the movable winning combination device 300 has passed the V winning member 382 after winning the left and right starting winning holes 26 and 27 or the middle starting winning hole 28. When the jackpot is reached, the first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) has elapsed, and the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is movably entered. The occurrence of a jackpot is indicated by displaying on a part of the ball accessory device 300. Thereafter, the game state transitions to a special game state (a jackpot or jackpot game) where the ball is easy to win. In this special gaming state, the wing 312 that is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapses or 10 balls are won).

  The wing 312 is closed when a predetermined time elapses, and after closing, the wing 312 is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the wing 312 can be repeated up to 15 times (for 16 rounds excluding the first round), for example. The state in which the opening / closing operation is performed is one form of a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player. Is done.

  Note that the special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. A large opening that is opened and closed separately from the wing 312 is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the jackpot is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the wing 312 is opened for a predetermined time, and the wing When the ball 312 is opened, a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the wing part 312 is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times is formed as a special game state when a ball wins into the first sensor 311b. You may do it. Further, the number of the first sensors 311b is not limited to one, and one or a plurality of two or more (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is not limited to the upper side of the movable pitching accessory device 300. For example, it may be below the left and right start winning openings 26 and 27.

  A sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate paper, an identification label or the like is provided at the lower right corner of the gaming board 13, and the certificate paper or the like attached to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. 35 (see FIG. 1).

  The game board 13 is provided with an out port 71. The game balls that flow down the game area and have not won any of the winning openings 26, 27, 28, 63 are guided through the out opening 71 to a ball discharge path (not shown). In addition, all game balls that have been driven into the game area, including game balls that have entered the movable ball accessory device 300, are collected to the back side of the game board 13. The collected game balls are discharged out of the frame from the back side of the pachinko machine 10 through an out passage assembly (not shown), and further join a supply path of an island facility (not shown).

  A number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (acts) such as a windmill are arranged.

  An example of the game of the gaming machine in this embodiment will be described. The purpose of the game of the present embodiment is to pass the game ball through the V winning member 382 and shift the game state to the special game state to obtain a prize ball. For this purpose, the player fires the game ball by adjusting the strength of the game ball so that the game ball slides down the upper surface of the center frame 86. As a result, when the game ball hits each start winning opening 26, 27, 28 while hitting a large number of nails, the wing 312 opens. At this time, if the game ball can be made to enter the movable ball accessory device 300 in a timely manner, the game ball passes through the V winning member 382 depending on the manner of the subsequent flow of the game ball. You can enjoy watching the actual movement of the game ball to see if you can get a big hit or lose it by visually checking the flow of the ball.

  That is, the first condition for obtaining a jackpot is to open the wing part 312 and the second condition is to allow the game ball to enter the movable ball accessory device 300 when the movable piece 190b is opened.

  Therefore, in order to obtain a big hit in this embodiment, a hitting method in which the game ball cannot reach the center frame 86 (so-called “choking”) or a hitting method in which the game ball reaches the return rubber 69 (so-called “right hit”). Is disadvantageous.

  As will be described later, in the present embodiment, a structure in which a big hit is easily obtained when two game balls are simultaneously entered into the movable entrance ball apparatus 300 is employed. Therefore, the player aims at the upper end of the center frame 86 (the apex portion pointed in a triangle) and launches it to disperse the game ball to the left and right, and from the left and right when the movable piece 190b is opened. Aiming at entering two balls one by one, it is possible to play a game so that it is easy to get a big hit.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the rear surface side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control apparatus 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control apparatus 111), a firing control board (launching control apparatus 112), a power supply board (power supply apparatus 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 and a dispensing unit 93 that form a protective cover. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as necessary.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are accommodated.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover so that they cannot be opened by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). Consolidated). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to cover the box base and the box cover. This seal seal is made of a brittle material. If the seal is to be peeled off in order to open the substrate boxes 100, 102, or if the substrate boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are removed. Cut to the side. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal.

  The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 that is located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out a game ball with a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). I have. The game balls supplied from the island facilities in the game hall are sequentially replenished to the tank 130, and a required number of game balls are paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated, for example, to eliminate ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball clogging in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 executes main processes of the pachinko machine 10 such as display setting in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device.

  Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller only in one direction.

  The RAM 203 stores various areas, counters, flags, a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. And a work area (work area) in which values are stored. Note that the RAM 203 is configured so that the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and the data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by the main process (see FIG. 4), and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in a startup process (see FIG. 4) when the power is turned on. Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is input immediately, the NMI interrupt process as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 constituted by an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 includes the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol hold lamp, and the lower side of the wing 312 of the first sensor 311b. A large opening solenoid 209a for opening and closing rotation driving left and right as an axis, an electric accessory solenoid 209b for driving a variable plate 652 of the variable winning device 650, or various solenoid motors 209 including a motor are connected. The MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205.

  Various types of direct switches 210 that are different from the various types of switches 208 and are directly related to the benefits given to the player are directly connected to the MPU 201 without going through the input / output port 205.

  The various solenoid motors 209 include at least a solenoid 317 for opening / closing and rotating the left and right sides of the wing 312 of the first sensor 311b as an axis, and a solenoid for opening / closing the variable plate 652 of the variable winning device 650. 655, and a drive motor 376R that rotationally drives the rotating bodies 372R and 372L.

  The various direct switches 210 include a left start winning port switch, a right start winning port switch, and a middle start winning port switch (not shown).

  The input / output port 205 includes a switch group (not shown), various switches 208 including a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115. Are connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. And a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the power failure signal SG1 is also input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball that has been paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the game ball is set according to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when the main control device 110 instructs the launch of the game ball. It is. The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited corresponding to the amount of rotation (rotation position) of the handle 51, and the game ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (lighting units 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and fluctuating effects (fluctuation). The display mode setting of the 7-segment display performed by the display control device 114, such as display) and the notice effect, is controlled. The MPU 221 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 including an address bus and a data bus. Main controller 110, display controller 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, other device 228, frame button 22 and the like are connected to input / output port 225, respectively.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM deletion switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts AC supplied from the outside, and drives various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as various solenoids and motors 209, 12 volts for driving motors and the like. Voltage, 5 volt voltage for logic, backup voltage for RAM backup, etc., and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage and backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 as necessary voltages. Supply.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to device 111.

  Next, a schematic configuration of the game board 13 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 is a front perspective view of the game board 13, FIG. 6 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board 13, and FIG. 7 is an exploded rear perspective view of the game board 13.

  As shown in FIGS. 5 to 7, the game board 13 includes a movable entrance ball accessory device 300 disposed inside an opening 60 a at the center of a base plate 60 made of a resin of a transparent flexible material, It is mainly provided with a winning opening unit 600 that is positioned on the lower side in the gravitational direction of the movable incoming ball accessory device 300 and disposed on the base plate 60, and an irradiation unit 900 that is disposed on the back side of the base plate 60. .

  The movable ball accessory device 300 is inserted from the front side into an opening 60a formed through the central portion of the base plate 60 in a front view. The movable entrance ball accessory apparatus 300 includes an edge portion having an outer shape larger than the opening 60 a, and the edge portion is disposed in contact with the front surface of the base plate 60. Thus, the movable ball accessory device 300 can be positioned and disposed with respect to the base plate 60 in the front-rear direction. The detailed description of the movable ball accessory device 300 will be described later.

  The winning a prize opening unit 600 is a unit that includes the above-described starting winning award openings 26, 27, and 28, and is located on the lower side in the gravitational direction of the movable winning ball accessory 300 and is disposed on the base plate 60. The detailed description of the prize opening unit 600 will be described later.

  The irradiation unit 900 is formed from a substantially rectangular frame state when viewed from the front, and its outer shape is smaller than the outer shape of the base plate 60 when viewed from the front. This makes it impossible for the player to directly view the irradiation unit 900 via the base plate 60.

  Moreover, the board | substrate (not shown) provided with LED is arrange | positioned inside the irradiation unit 900, and the light irradiated from LED is irradiated to the front side (player side). As described above, since the base plate 60 is formed of a resin of a transparent flexible material, the player side can be irradiated with light emitted from the LEDs of the irradiation unit 900 via the base plate 60.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 8 to FIG. 90, the detailed configurations of the movable ball accessory device 300 and the winning opening unit 600 will be described. First, with reference to FIGS. 8 to 80, the movable ball accessory device 300 will be described.

  First, with reference to FIGS. 8 to 13, the overall configuration of the movable ball accessory device 300 will be described. FIG. 8 is a front view of the movable incoming ball accessory device 300, and FIG. 9 is a rear view of the movable incoming ball accessory device 300. FIG. 10 is a front perspective view of the movable incoming ball accessory device 300, and FIG. 11 is a rear perspective view of the movable incoming ball accessory device 300. FIG. 12 is an exploded front perspective view of the movable incoming ball accessory apparatus 300, and FIG. 13 is an exploded rear perspective view of the movable incoming ball accessory apparatus 300.

  As shown in FIGS. 8 to 13, the movable ball accessory device 300 is superimposed on the center frame 310 formed in a substantially rectangular frame state in front view and the upper side in the gravity direction on the back side of the center frame 310. Intermediate member 330, rear member 350 disposed on the back side of intermediate member 330, variable unit 360 disposed on the back side of center frame 310, and back side of variable unit 360 and rear member 350 And a control board 410 provided on the back side of the back surface base 390.

  In the movable ball accessory device 300, the player can visually recognize the intermediate member 330, the rear member 350, and the variable unit 360 disposed on the back side through the inside of the center frame 310 in a frame state (see FIG. 8). .

  Next, a detailed configuration of the center frame 310 will be described with reference to FIGS. 14 and 15. FIG. 14 is an exploded front perspective view of the center frame 310, and FIG. 15 is an exploded rear perspective view of the center frame 310.

  As shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, the center frame 310 includes a frame body 311 that is formed in a frame shape when viewed from the front, and a wing portion 312 that is rotatably supported on the upper side in the gravity direction on the front side of the frame body 311. An upper front cover 313 that is arranged in a manner to cover the front side of the frame 311 and has a wing 312 interposed between the frame 311 and a solenoid 317 that generates a driving force for rotating the wing 312; The shaft portion 315 that transmits the driving force of the solenoid 317 to the wing portion 312, the back cover 316 that houses the solenoid 317, and the solenoid 317 comes out of the back cover 316 so as to be covered on the back side of the back cover 316. It is mainly provided with a ventilation cover 318 for suppressing the above.

  The frame body 311 is formed in a front-view frame state, and is disposed on a recess 311a that is recessed toward the back side on the front surface in the gravity direction upper side, and an edge portion on the lower side in the gravity direction of the recess 311a. A pair of first sensors 311b, an upper inclined portion 311c formed between the pair of first sensors 311b, a downward inclined portion 311d formed on the inner peripheral surface on the lower side in the gravity direction, and a downward inclined portion 311d A recovery hole 311e that is opened to a size that allows a game ball to pass therethrough at both ends thereof, and a through hole 311f that is formed through the recess 311a from the front side to the back side.

  The recess 311a is a recess for forming a gap through which a game ball can pass between facing the upper front cover 313, which will be described later, and the recess dimension is set larger than the diameter of the game ball. Moreover, the recessed part 311a is formed in the crescent moon shape which curves to a gravity direction lower side (FIG. 8 lower side) as it goes to the left-right direction (FIG. 8 left-right direction) both ends in front view. Thereby, the game ball that has flowed down to the edge of the recess 311a can flow down while rolling to the outside of the frame 311 along the curved shape.

  The upper inclined portion 311c is located at the central portion in the left-right direction of the frame body 311 and is formed on the other edge of the recess 311a (the surface connecting the front surface of the recess 311a and the front surface of the frame body 311). The upward inclined portion 311c is formed to be inclined downward in the gravitational direction as it goes from the central portion of the frame body 311 to both ends in the left-right direction. As a result, when a game ball is sent between the recess 311a (frame body 311) and the upper front cover 313, the sent game ball rolls on the upper surface of the upper inclined portion 311c due to gravity, and moves upward. It falls from the end (left and right ends) of the inclined portion 311c.

  The first sensor 311b is formed with a first detection hole 311b1 having an opening that allows a game ball to pass therethrough. The first sensor 311b can detect the passing of the game ball by passing the game ball inside the first detection hole 311b1.

  The first sensor 311b is disposed outside the both ends in the left-right direction of the upper inclined portion 311c so that the first detection holes 311b1 open in the gravitational direction, and is positioned below the lower inclined end of the upper inclined portion 311c. Arranged. Therefore, as described above, when the game ball rolling on the upper inclined portion 311c rolls to the end of the upper inclined portion 311c and falls from the upper inclined portion 311c, the inside of the first detection hole 311b1 of the first sensor 311b. Pass through. Thereby, the game ball sent between the confrontation of the recessed part 311a and the upper front cover 313 by the 1st sensor 311b is detectable.

  The through-hole 311f is a hole into which a rotation shaft 315a of a shaft portion 315 described later is inserted, and is penetrated from the front to the back on the other side of the recess 311a, and the inner diameter thereof is the outer diameter of the rotation shaft 315a. Is formed larger.

  The descending inclined portion 311d is a surface that receives a game ball sent from the front of the variable unit 360 and sends it to the collection hole 311e when a game ball sent from the upper part of the variable unit 360, which will be described later, falls from the front of the variable unit 360. 310 is formed on the inner peripheral surface on the other side. The descending inclined portion 311d is formed to be inclined downward in the gravitational direction from the substantially central position in the left-right direction toward the outside. Therefore, the game ball sent to the upper part of the downward inclination part 311d can be rolled along the inclination to the terminal position of the downward inclination part 311d.

  As described above, the recovery hole 311e is a hole through which the game ball sent to the descending inclined portion 311d is next sent, and is formed in an opening larger than the outer diameter of the ball, and the horizontal direction of the descending inclined portion 311d Formed at both ends. Therefore, as described above, when the game ball rolling on the upper part of the descending inclined part 311d rolls to the end of the descending inclined part 311d and falls from the descending inclined part 311d, it is sent into the collection hole 311e.

  The wing 312 is formed in a substantially triangular shape when viewed from the front, and its thickness is set to be substantially the same as the diameter of the game ball. Further, the wing portion 312 is formed with a shaft support hole 312a which is recessed in a circular shape toward the front side on the other side (lower side in the direction of gravity) on the back side.

  The shaft support hole 312a is a hole into which a rotation shaft 315a of a shaft portion 315 described later is fitted, and is formed to have an inner diameter substantially the same as or smaller than the outer diameter of the rotation shaft 315a. Accordingly, when the rotation shaft 315a of the shaft portion 315 is rotated, the wing portion 312 can be rotationally displaced about the shaft support hole 312a. A detailed description of the operation of the wing part 312 will be given later.

  The upper front cover 313 is a plate for forming a flow path for the game ball on the front side of the frame 311 and is disposed with a gap larger than the front of the recess 311a of the frame 311 and the diameter of the game ball. The Thus, a gap is formed between the concave portion 311a and the upper front cover 313 so that the game ball can flow down. Further, the upper front cover 313 is formed of a transparent plate-like body, and it is possible to visually recognize the game ball flowing down between the opposing portions of the recess 311a and the upper front cover 313.

  The upper front cover 313 is formed in a semicircular arc shape in which one side (the upper side in the direction of gravity) is curved, and includes a bulging portion 313a that protrudes to the back side of one end portion.

  The bulging portion 313a is a protruding portion for preventing a game ball flowing down from above the upper front cover 313 in the direction of gravity from entering between the opposing portions of the concave portion 311a and the upper front cover 313. It is formed in the upper part between the opposing wings 312. When the wing 312 is positioned in the first state (the wing 312 is not rotationally displaced and the tip A1 is positioned on the upper side in the gravity direction of the shaft support hole 312a), the wing 312 and the bulging portion The gap with 313a is set to be smaller than the diameter of the game ball, and the game ball flowing down the front side of the game board 13 cannot enter between the recess 311a and the upper front cover 313 (FIG. 17). (See (a)).

  The solenoid 317 is a driving unit that applies a driving force to the wing part 312 and is mainly provided with a shaft part 317a that displaces the piston and a transmission part 317b that is formed below the shaft part 317a in the gravity direction. The

  The shaft portion 317 a is formed in a cylindrical shape, and one side is inserted into the solenoid 317. The shaft portion 317 a is disposed so that its axial direction is parallel to the gravitational direction. When electric power is applied to the solenoid 317, the shaft portion 317 a is displaced upward in the gravitational direction and drawn into the solenoid 317. That is, the shaft portion 317a can perform a piston motion in the direction of gravity.

  The transmission portion 317b is formed to project in a D shape having an opening 317b1 from the other side of the shaft portion 317a. An opening 317b1 of the transmission portion 317b is formed to open from the front side to the back side, and a variable shaft 315b described later is inserted therein. Therefore, when the shaft portion 317a is piston-moved in the gravity direction, the variable shaft 315b inserted in the transmission portion 317b is displaced in the gravity direction.

  The shaft portion 315 is a shaft that transmits the driving force of the solenoid 317 to the wing portion 312. The shaft portion 315 is disposed at one end on the front side and is connected to the wing portion 312. The shaft portion 315 is disposed on one end on the back side. Thus, a variable shaft 315b engaged with the solenoid 317 and a connecting portion 315c for connecting the rotating shaft 315a and the variable shaft 315b are mainly provided.

  As described above, the rotation shaft 315a is a shaft that transmits a driving force for rotating the wing 312. One end of the front side is inserted from the back side of the through hole 311f of the frame body 311 and protrudes to the front side. At the same time, the shaft support hole 312a of the wing 312 is fitted on the end protruding from the front side of the frame 311.

  As described above, the variable shaft 315b has its rear end inserted into the transmission portion 317b of the solenoid 317, and is displaced by driving the solenoid 317.

  The connecting portion 315c is a connecting portion that connects the rotating shaft 315a and the variable shaft 315b, and connects the end portion on the back side of the rotating shaft 315a and the end portion on the front side of the variable shaft 315b. The rotating shaft 315a and the variable shaft 315b are connected in such a manner that their axes are parallel to each other. That is, the rotating shaft 315a and the variable shaft 315b are connected by the connecting portion 315c at an eccentric position. Thereby, when the variable shaft 315b is displaced in the direction of gravity, the displacement is transmitted to the rotating shaft 315a by the connecting portion 315c, and the rotating shaft 315a is rotationally displaced. As a result, the wing part 312 can be rotationally displaced.

  The back cover 316 is a plate for disposing the solenoid 317 therein. The back cover 316 is disposed so as to cover the back surface on the one side of the frame body 311 in the gravity direction, and the solenoid 317 is disposed on the back surface side. A recessed portion 316a is provided, and an opening 316b is formed below the recessed portion 316a in the direction of gravity.

  The recessed portion 316 a is a recess for disposing the solenoid 317 therein, and is recessed at a position facing the solenoid 317. The depth of the recessed portion 316a is set to be approximately the same as the thickness dimension of the solenoid 317 in the front-rear direction, and is disposed at a position where the back side of the back cover 316 and the back side of the solenoid 317 are substantially coincident. The Therefore, the solenoid cover 318 cannot be removed from the back cover 316 by covering the back cover 316 with the ventilation cover 318 formed of a plate-like body.

  The opening 316b is an opening for engaging the variable shaft 315b of the shaft portion 315 with the transmission portion 317b of the solenoid 317, and is formed in an opening larger than the displacement region of the variable shaft 315b. Thereby, the driving force of the solenoid 317 disposed on the back side of the back cover 316 can be transmitted to the shaft portion 315.

  Next, the displacement operation of the wing part 312 will be described with reference to FIGS. 16 and 17. 16A to 16C are partially enlarged rear views of the center frame 310, and FIGS. 17A to 17C are partially enlarged front views of the center frame 310. FIG.

  16A and 17A show the first state before the wing 312 is displaced, and FIGS. 16C and 17C show the third state after the wing 312 is displaced. However, FIG. 16B and FIG. 17B illustrate the second state of the intermediate position in the middle of the displacement from the first state to the third state, respectively. Moreover, in FIG. 17, the edge part on the opposite side to the axial support hole 312a of the wing | blade part 312 is demonstrated as front-end | tip part A1.

  Further, in FIGS. 16A to 16C, the ventilation cover 318 and the upper front cover 313 are transparently illustrated in FIGS. 17A to 17C, respectively. Moreover, in FIG.16 and FIG.17, the rotating shaft 315a is illustrated with a broken line.

  As shown in FIGS. 16A and 17A, in the first state, the shaft portion 317a of the solenoid 317 is disposed in a state of protruding downward in the gravity direction. As a result, the variable shaft 315b inserted through the opening 317b1 of the transmission portion 317b is in a state of being located below the rotation shaft 315a in the gravity direction. In this case, the tip A1 of the wing part 312 that externally fits the rotating shaft 315a is above the shaft support hole 312a (rotating shaft 315a) in the gravitational direction (upper side in FIG. 17A) and is opposed to the pair of wing parts 312 Located inside.

  When power is applied to the solenoid 317 from the state shown in FIGS. 16 (a) and 17 (a) and the shaft portion 317a is displaced upward in the direction of gravity, the second state shown in FIGS. 16 (b) and 17 (b). State.

  As shown in FIGS. 16B and 17B, in the second state, the shaft 317a is displaced upward in the direction of gravity and accommodated in the solenoid 317, so that the variable shaft 315b of the shaft 315 is accommodated. , While being rotated about the axis of the rotation shaft 315a, it is displaced upward in the gravitational direction. When the variable shaft 315b is rotationally displaced, the rotational displacement is transmitted to the rotational shaft 315a via the connecting portion 315c, and the rotational shaft 315a is rotated. Thereby, the wing | blade part 312 is rotationally displaced centering on the axial support hole 312a.

  In the second state, the tip portion A1 of the wing portion 312 is located on the outer side between the facing of the pair of wing portions 312 and the gap between the tip portion A1 and the bulging portion 313a of the upper front cover 313 is outside the game ball. It is made larger than the diameter. That is, in the second state, it is possible to allow a game ball that flows down from the upper side in the direction of gravity to flow between the recess 311a of the frame 311 and the upper front cover.

  The second state is an intermediate position in the displacement from the first state to the third state. That is, the displacement of the wing 312 is performed as a series of operations of the position of the first state described above and the position of the third state described later.

  When the power is continuously applied to the solenoid 317 from the state shown in FIGS. 16B and 17B and the shaft portion 317a is further displaced upward in the gravitational direction, the state shown in FIGS. 16C and 17C is obtained. The third state is shown.

  As shown in FIGS. 16B and 17B, in the third state, the shaft portion 317a is displaced further upward in the gravitational direction than the second state described above and is accommodated in the solenoid 317. Thereby, the variable shaft 315b of the shaft portion 315 is displaced upward in the gravitational direction while further rotating around the axis of the rotation shaft 315a. When the variable shaft 315b is rotationally displaced, similarly to the displacement from the first state to the second state described above, the rotational displacement of the variable shaft 315b is transmitted to the rotational shaft 315a via the connecting portion 315c, and the rotational shaft 315a is transmitted. It is further rotated. Therefore, the wing portion 312 is further rotationally displaced about the shaft support hole 312a as compared with the second state.

  In the third state, the tip end portion A1 of the wing portion 312 is located on the outer side between the facing of the pair of wing portions 312, and an imaginary line S1 connecting the tip portion A1 and the shaft support hole 312a (rotating shaft 315a) is It is in a state of tilting about 45 degrees outward in the left-right direction with respect to the direction of gravity. As a result, the area where the wings 312 can receive the game balls flowing down the game board 13 is enlarged, so that the game balls can easily flow between the recess 311a of the frame 311 and the upper front cover 313. it can.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 18, the game ball flowing down the game board 13 in the first state and the third state will be described. FIG. 18A is a partially enlarged front view of the center frame 310 in the first state, and FIG. 18B is a partially enlarged front view of the center frame 310 in the third state.

  As shown in FIG. 18 (a), in the first state, the gap between the tip A1 of the wing 312 and the bulging portion 313a of the upper front cover 313 is made smaller than the diameter of the game ball. The game ball cannot flow between the recess 311a and the upper front cover 313.

  Therefore, the game ball flowing down from above the center frame 310 does not flow between the recess 311a of the frame 311 and the upper front cover 313, and the center frame 310 (movable ball accessory device 300) in the left-right direction. Flow down on both sides.

  On the other hand, in the third state, as described above, the imaginary line S1 connecting the tip A1 of the wing 312 and the shaft support hole 312a is inclined by approximately 45 degrees with respect to the direction of gravity. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 18B, the game ball can flow between the recess 311 a of the frame 311 and the upper front cover 313.

  Therefore, the game ball that flows down from the upper side of the center frame 310 and collides with the upper side of the wing part 312 is rolled and sent by the wing part 312 between the recess 311a of the frame 311 and the upper front cover 313. The

  Next, the detailed configuration of the intermediate member 330 will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 and 20. 19A is a front view of the intermediate member 330, FIG. 19B is a rear view of the intermediate member 330, and FIG. 19C is a cross-sectional view taken along line XIXc-XIXc in FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view of an intermediate member 330. FIG. 20A is an exploded front perspective view of the intermediate member 330, and FIG. 20B is an exploded rear perspective view of the intermediate member 330. FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 19 and 20, the intermediate member 330 is disposed on both sides of the main body portion 331 formed in a substantially rectangular shape in front view and the left and right outer sides of the main body portion 331 and irradiates the inside of the main body portion 331. The decorative base 332 is mainly provided and formed.

  The main body portion 331 picks up a game ball sent between the concave portion 311a of the frame body 311 of the center frame 310 and the upper front cover 313 at the lower side in the gravity direction of the first sensor 311b and sends it to the back side. A receiving portion 331a that protrudes from a substantially central position on the front side and whose tip is disposed below the first detection hole 311b1 (first sensor 311b) in the gravitational direction; and the lower side in the gravitational direction of the receiving portion 331a And a guide portion 331b for guiding a game ball sent from the receiving portion 331a to a plurality of flow paths.

  Moreover, the main-body part 331 is formed from a transparent flexible material. Thereby, the light irradiated from the decoration base 332 arrange | positioned in the left-right direction outer side of the main-body part 331 can be irradiated to the inner side of the main-body part 331.

  The receiving portion 331a is formed in a substantially U-shaped cross section in which the upper side in the gravitational direction (the upper side in the vertical direction in FIG. 19A) is open when viewed from the front. The protruding front end of the receiving portion 331a is inserted into the opening of the frame 311 of the center frame 310, and is positioned below the first detection hole 311b1 (first sensor 311b) in the gravity direction of the frame 311. Arranged. Thereby, as described above, the game ball passing through the first detection hole 311b1 of the frame 311 (center frame 310) can be dropped onto the inner surface (U-shaped inner portion) of the receiving portion 331a.

  Further, the receiving portion 331a is formed so as to be inclined downward as the bottom surface on the lower side in the direction of gravity moves from the front side to the back side (see FIG. 19C). Thereby, the game ball dropped on the receiving portion 331a can be rolled along the descending slope and sent to the back side of the main body portion 331.

  The guide portion 331b is formed to protrude from the back side of the main body portion 331 on the lower side in the gravity direction of the receiving portion 331a (the lower side in the vertical direction in FIG. 19B). The guide portion 331b is formed by projecting two large and small U-shapes opened on the lower side in the direction of gravity with a predetermined interval larger than the diameter of the game ball.

  The inner guide portion 331b1 formed in the small U-shape of the guide portion 331b is formed such that the upper surface thereof is inclined downward from the substantially central position in the left-right direction. Thereby, the game ball sent to the upper part of the inner side guide part 331b1 can be rolled in the left-right direction on the upper surface of the inner side guide part 331b1.

  As described above, the outer guide portion 331b2 formed in the large U-shape of the guide portion 331b is formed with a gap larger than the diameter of the inner guide portion 331b1 and the game ball. Thereby, a game ball can be guided between the inner side guide part 331b1 and the outer side guide part 331b2. The game ball guided between the inner guide part 331b1 and the outer guide part 331b2 is sent to the first rolling part 381a of the main body part 380, which will be described later.

  A standing wall 331c that protrudes from the back side of the main body 331 extends in the direction of gravity outside the outer guide 331b2 in the left-right direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 19B). The standing wall 331c is formed with an interval larger than the outer guide portion 331b2 and the diameter of the game ball. As a result, a game ball that is sent to the upper surface of the outer guide portion 331b2 and falls from the upper surface of the outer guide portion 331b2 can be sent between the outer guide portion 331b2 and the standing wall 331c so as to flow down.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 21 and FIG. 23, a description will be given of the delivery of game balls from the center frame 310 to the intermediate member 330. FIG. 21A is a front view of the center frame 310 and the intermediate member 330, FIG. 21B is a side view of the center frame 310 and the intermediate member 330, and FIG. 21C is FIG. It is a partial expanded sectional view of the center frame 310 and the intermediate member 330 in the XXIc-XXIc line | wire of a). 22A to 22C are front views of the center frame 310 and the intermediate member 330. FIG. FIG. 23A to FIG. 23C are partial enlarged cross-sectional views of the center frame 310 and the intermediate member 330.

  21 to 23 show a state in which the center frame 310 and the intermediate member 330 are combined. 22 and 23, the center frame 310 in the third state (the state in which the wing 312 is rotated around the shaft support hole 312a) is illustrated, and in FIGS. 23 (a) to 23 (c), A cross section corresponding to the cross sectional view of FIG. Furthermore, in FIG.22 and FIG.23, the transition state by which a ball | bowl is sent is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 21A to 21C, in the state where the center frame 310 and the intermediate member 330 are combined, the protruding tip of the receiving portion 331 a of the intermediate member 330 is formed on the upper front cover 313 of the center frame 310. The front and the position in the direction of gravity are almost the same. That is, the receiving part 331a is provided to project to a position facing the first sensor 311b in the direction of gravity. Therefore, as described above, the game ball flowing through the first sensor 311b can be dropped onto the receiving portion 331a.

  As shown in FIG. 22A and FIG. 23A, in the wing part 312 in the third state, the game ball flowing down from the upper side in the gravity direction of the center frame comes into contact with the wing part 312 and the two wing parts A ball is sent between 312 faces. Thereby, as shown in FIG. 22B and FIG. 23B, the sphere is sent between the concave portion 311 a of the frame body 311 and the upper front cover 313 facing each other.

  As shown in FIGS. 22 (b) and 23 (b), a game ball sent between the upper front cover 313 and the recess 311a of the frame 311 is arranged on the lower edge of the recess 311a in the direction of gravity. The ball passes through the inside of the inner guide portion 331b1 of the first sensor 311b and is sent to the inside of the receiving portion 331a shown in FIGS. 22 (c) and 23 (c).

  As shown in FIGS. 22 (c) and 23 (c), a curved portion (a U-shaped curved portion in front view) of the receiving portion 331a is located on the lower side in the gravity direction of the inner guide portion 331b1 of the first sensor 311b. Be positioned. Thereby, it can suppress that the game ball which fell to the receiving part 331a repels and bounces. As a result, it can suppress that the rolling speed of the game ball rolling inside the receiving part 331a becomes slow.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 24, the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the receiving portion 331a will be described. 24A to 24C are sectional views of the center frame 310 and the intermediate member 330. FIG. FIGS. 24A to 24C illustrate the transition state of the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the receiving portion 331a. Further, FIGS. 24A to 24C correspond to the cross section of FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 24 (a) to FIG. 24 (c), the game ball sent to the upper surface of the receiving portion 331a rolls on the upper surface of the receiving portion 331a by a downward inclination toward the base side (back side). And roll to the base side of the receiving portion 331a. At this time, as described above, since the curved portion of the receiving portion 331a is located below the inner guide portion 331b1 of the first sensor 311b in the gravity direction, the game ball flowing down from the inner guide portion 331b1 is received by the receiving portion 331a. It can collide with a curved part. Thereby, it is possible to give a displacement in the left-right direction to the game ball flowing down in the direction of gravity. Therefore, the rolling of the game ball flowing down the upper surface of the receiving portion 331a can be rolled not only to the base of the receiving portion 331a but also in the left-right direction, and the player can make the rolling state of the gaming ball longer. Show and improve the interest of the player.

  In addition, since the curved portion has higher rigidity than the flat surface, the receiving portion when the game ball falls to the upper surface of the receiving portion 331a can be obtained by setting the flowing position of the gaming ball to the upper surface of the receiving portion 331a as the curved portion. It can suppress that 331a is damaged by the impact.

  Next, the rear member 350 will be described with reference to FIGS. 25 to 27. 25 (a) is a front view of the rear member 350, FIG. 25 (b) is a rear view of the rear member 350, and FIG. 25 (c) is taken along line XXVc-XXVc in FIG. 25 (a). 4 is a cross-sectional view of a rear member 350. FIG. FIG. 26 is an exploded front perspective view of the rear member 350, and FIG. 27 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rear member 350.

  As shown in FIGS. 25 to 27, the rear member 350 includes a rear body portion 351 formed from a substantially trapezoidal plate-like body when viewed from the front, and an opening 351 b that opens in the front-rear direction at the center of the rear body portion 351. A variable plate 352 that is displaceably disposed on the inside, and a prize that is attached to the back body 351 with the variable plate 352 interposed therebetween, and a game ball is sent to the inside as the variable plate 352 is displaced. A member 353, a decoration member 354 attached to the winning member 353 and forming a game ball sending path inside the winning member 353, and attached to the decorative member 354 and lighted to the player side through the decorative member 354 The light emitting member 355 for irradiating the light, the solenoid 356 for applying a driving force to the variable plate 352, and the decorative member 354 are attached via the solenoid 356 so that the solenoid 356 is held so as not to fall off. And over member 357 is formed mainly includes.

  The back body 351 includes a standing portion 351a that protrudes in a U-shaped cross section on the front side, an opening 351b that is formed inside the standing portion 351a and that extends from the front to the back, and the left-right direction of the opening 351b. A bearing portion 352f which is located on both outer sides and holds a shaft portion 352a of a variable plate 352 described later, and a game ball which is opened from the front to the back on the lower side in the gravity direction of the opening 351b and is sent to the back side from the opening 351b. Are mainly provided with a first recess 351d and a second recess 351e that are recessed from the front toward the back at the lower end of the back body 351 in the direction of gravity. .

  The back main body portion 351 is a member that causes the game ball that rolls (receives the intermediate member 330) to roll down the receiving portion 331 a of the intermediate member 330 (main body portion 331) to flow downward in the gravitational direction. It is attached to the intermediate member 330 with a space larger than the back side and the diameter of the game ball. Thereby, the game ball can be caused to flow down between the intermediate member 330 and the back body portion 351.

  Further, the rear body 351 is formed so that the outer shape in front view is substantially the same as or smaller than the outer shape of the intermediate member 330. As a result, it is possible to prevent the member from protruding outward from the center frame 310 of the assembled movable entrance ball apparatus 300 in the assembled state, and to attach the movable entrance ball apparatus 300 to the opening 60a of the base plate 60. When wearing, it can be arranged simply by inserting the movable incoming ball accessory device 300 from the front, and the movable incoming ball accessory device 300 can be easily attached to the base plate 60.

  The standing portion 351a is formed in a U shape whose lower side is opened in a front view. The standing portion 351a includes a first standing portion 351a1 having a small width dimension between the facing portions, and a second standing portion 351a2 having a larger distance dimension between the facing portions than the first standing portion 351a1.

  In the first standing portion 351a1, the distance between the left and right sides of the receiving portion 331a of the intermediate member 330 is set to be substantially the same as the distance between the left and right sides of the receiving portion 331a. It is arrange | positioned in the position which opposes the edge part on either side on either side in the front-back direction. Further, the height position in the gravity direction of the upper end portion of the first standing portion 351a1 is set to be substantially the same as the upper end coincidence of the receiving portion 331a. Thereby, the game ball that is sent by rolling on the upper surface of the receiving portion 331a of the intermediate member 330 can be caused to flow down between the intermediate member 330 and the back main body portion 351, and the inside of the standing portion 351a. Can flow down.

  The second standing portion 351a2 is formed by being connected to the lower end portion of the first standing portion 352a1 in the gravity direction. The distance dimension between the facing portions of the second standing portion 351a2 is set to be approximately the same as the longitudinal dimension of the opening 351b, and when the variable plate 352 disposed inside the opening 351b is varied, the longitudinal dimension of the variable plate 352 is changed. It is possible to suppress the game ball from flowing down on the outside in the direction. Thereby, when the variable plate 352 is displaced, it is possible to reliably cause the game ball flowing down between the back body portion, the 351 and the intermediate member 330 to face the opening 351b.

  The opening 351b is an opening for allowing a game ball flowing down between the intermediate member 330 and the back main body portion 351 to face the back side of the back main body portion 351, and is formed in a horizontally long rectangle when viewed from the front. The width dimension in the hand direction is set larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, as described above, the opening 351b is formed between the left and right opposing portions of the second standing portion 351a2.

  The connection hole 351c is a hole through which the game ball passed through the inside of the opening 351b and sent to the back side of the back main body part is sent to the front side through a prize-winning member 353 described later, and below the opening 351b in the gravitational direction. It is located and formed in a rectangular shape larger than the diameter of the sphere. Two connecting holes 351c are arranged side by side in the left-right direction.

  The first recess 351d is a path through which the game ball sent from the connection hole 351c to the front side of the rear body 351 is guided and flows down to the upper surface of the inner guide part of the intermediate member 330 described above. And is recessed toward the back side.

  Further, the first concave portion 351d is positioned between the inner guide portion 331b1 and the outer guide portion 331b2 of the intermediate member 330 facing each other when the back main body 351 (the rear member 350) is disposed on the intermediate member 330. Formed. Therefore, it is possible to displace the flow direction of the game ball flowing down between the inner guide portion 331b1 and the outer guide portion 331b2 to the back side. Thereby, when the game ball sent between the opposed members of the intermediate member 330 and the back main body portion 351 is caused to flow down to the variable unit 360 described later, the flow-down speed in the direction of gravity can be reduced. Therefore, when a game ball is sent to the variable unit 360, it is possible to suppress the game ball from bouncing by colliding with the variable unit 360, and the ball from the rear member 350 to the variable unit 360 can be stabilized.

  The second recess 351e is a path through which the game ball flowing down between the facing of the intermediate member 330 and the rear member 350 is guided by the upper surface of the outer guide portion 331b2 of the intermediate member 330 and flows in the left-right direction of the first recess 351d. It is located outside and is recessed toward the back side.

  The second recess 351e is located between the outer guide portion 331b2 of the intermediate member 330 and the standing wall 331c when viewed from the front when the back body 351 (rear member 350) is disposed on the intermediate member 330. Formed. Therefore, it is possible to displace the flow direction of the game ball flowing down between the opposing sides of the outer guide portion 331b2 and the standing wall 331c to the back side. Thereby, when the game ball sent between the opposed members of the intermediate member 330 and the back main body portion 351 is caused to flow down to the variable unit 360 described later, the flow-down speed in the direction of gravity can be reduced. Therefore, when a game ball is sent to the variable unit 360, it is possible to suppress the game ball from bouncing by colliding with the variable unit 360, and the ball from the rear member 359 to the variable unit 360 can be stabilized.

  As described above, the variable plate 352 is a guide member for sending the game ball flowing down between the intermediate member 330 and the back main body portion 351 (rear member 350) to the inside of the opening 351b of the back main body portion 351. Yes, and arranged in a rotatable state inside the opening 351b of the back body 351.

  The variable plate 352 is formed from a transparent flexible material. In addition, the variable plate 352 is disposed inside the opening 351b of the back body 351 and is rotated by protruding from both ends in the longitudinal direction of the plate portion 352d and a plate portion 352d formed in a horizontally long plate-like body in front view. A shaft portion 352a that is pivotally supported, and a first member that engages with the back main body portion 351 and regulates the amount of displacement of the variable plate 352 when the variable plate 352 is displaced from the shaft portion 352a to the outside in the radial direction. The protrusion 352b is formed mainly including a first protrusion 352b and a second protrusion 352c that protrudes in a radial direction different from that of the first protrusion 352b and transmits a driving force of a solenoid 356 of a driving unit described later.

  The plate portion 352d is a plate-like body that guides a game ball that is rotationally displaced and flows down between the facing portion of the intermediate member 330 and the back body portion 351 to the opening 351b, and has a horizontally long rectangle whose outer shape in front view is smaller than that of the opening 351b. Formed.

  The plate portion 352d includes a front portion 352d2 that faces the intermediate member 330 in a state before displacement, and a bulging portion 352d1 that bulges toward the intermediate member 330 from the end opposite to the rotation shaft (shaft portion 352a). Is provided. A detailed description of the bulging portion 352d1 and the front portion 352d2 will be described later.

  The shaft portion 352a is a shaft portion that is rotatably supported by the plate portion 352d, and is formed to protrude from one end on the lower side in the gravity direction at both ends in the longitudinal direction of the plate portion 352d. The shaft portion 352a is disposed inside the bearing portion 351f of the back body portion 351, and a winning member 353, which will be described later, is disposed from the back side, so that it can rotate between the back body portion 351 and the winning member 353. Retained. Thereby, the variable plate 352 can be rotationally displaced with respect to the back body 351.

  The first protrusion 352b is a protrusion that abuts against the back body 351 when the variable plate 352 is rotationally displaced, and regulates the amount of displacement of the variable plate 352 during rotation. The first protrusion 352b radially extends from the shaft portions 352a at both left and right ends. Protrusively formed. In addition, the protruding directions of the first protrusions 352b of the shaft portions 352a at both ends are set to be substantially the same when the shaft portion 352a is viewed in the axial direction.

  Furthermore, one first protrusion 352b (in this embodiment, the first protrusion 352b on the right side in front view) is engaged with a transmission portion 356a of a solenoid 356 described later. Thereby, the driving force of the solenoid 356 can be transmitted to the variable plate 352. Therefore, the variable plate 352 can be rotated around the axis of the shaft portion 352a by the driving force of the solenoid 356.

  Further, a second protrusion 352c is formed on the shaft portion 352a of the first protrusion 352b so as to protrude from the shaft portion 352a in the radial direction. When the shaft portion 352a is viewed in the axial direction, the first protrusion 352b and the second protrusion 352c are formed with a predetermined clearance around the shaft, and the tip of the transmission portion 356a of the solenoid 356 is inserted into the clearance. . As a result, the driving force is applied from the solenoid 356 and the transmission portion 356a is displaced, so that the variable plate 352 can be rotated around the axis of the shaft portion 252a. A detailed description of the operation of the variable plate 352 will be described later.

  The winning member 353 is a member that forms a path through which the game ball sent to the inside of the opening 351b of the back body 351 is displaced by the displacement of the variable plate 352, and is connected to the opening 351b of the back body 351. A hole 353a, a second detection hole 353b opening downward to the inner edge of the connection hole 353a, a front detection opening 353c having one end connected to the second detection hole 353b and the other end opening to the front side, and a rear surface The first irregular reflection part 353d formed on the side, the through hole 353e through which the transmission part 356a of the solenoid 356 is inserted, and the standing wall 353f standing from the edge of the first irregular reflection part 353d are mainly formed. Is done.

  The connecting hole 353a is formed to penetrate the outer shape substantially the same as the outer shape of the opening 351b of the back main body 351 when viewed from the front, and is formed at a position facing the opening 351b. Thereby, a game ball sent into the opening 351b can be sent into the connection hole 353a.

  The second detection hole 353b is a hole formed by a sensor that detects passage of a sphere, and is formed with an inner diameter larger than the diameter of the sphere. The second detection hole 353b is formed at the inner edge of the connection hole 353a on the lower side in the gravitational direction and is formed to open in the gravitational direction. Thereby, the game ball sent to the inside of the connection hole 353a can be sent through the second detection hole 353b, and when passing through the second detection hole 353b, the number of balls is detected by the sensor, The number of spheres passing through the opening 351b can be measured.

  The front opening 353c is a hole for sending a game ball sent to the second detection hole 353b into the connection hole 351c of the back body 351, and one end of the opening is connected to the second detection hole 353b. The other end is connected to the connection hole 351c of the back body 351 from the back side. Therefore, the game ball sent to the inside of the opening 351b of the back body part 351 can be discharged from the connection hole 351c of the back body part 351 through the inside of the front opening 353c through the second detection hole 353b.

  The first irregular reflection portion 353d is an irregular reflection surface that irregularly reflects light emitted from the LED 355a of the light emitting member 355 described later and emits the light forward, and is formed of a transparent flexible material and a plurality of uneven surfaces. The By making the light emitted from the LED 355a of the light emitting member 355 incident on the plurality of uneven surfaces, the traveling direction of the light emitted from the front side of the first irregular reflection part 353d to the player side is dispersed, and the first irregular reflection part 353d. Can be efficiently illuminated.

  The through-hole 353e is an opening through which the transmission part 356a of the solenoid 356 is inserted from the back side to the front side. The through hole 353e is formed in a vertically long rectangle larger than the outer shape of the transmission part 356a in the front view, and the transmission part 356a of the solenoid 356 It penetrates and is formed in the position which opposes.

  The standing wall 353f is a wall that prevents light emitted from the LED 355a of the light emitting member 355 from escaping to the outside, and the standing height is set at a position where the standing member abuts the decorative member 354. Therefore, it can suppress that the light irradiated to the 1st irregular reflection part 353d side from LED355a escapes outside from the standing wall 353f.

  The decoration member 354 is formed in a substantially rectangular plate-like body in front view, and the outer shape in front view is substantially the same as the outer shape of the winning member 353. The decoration member 354 includes a second irregular reflection portion 354b formed on a surface facing the light emitting member 355, which will be described later, an opening 354a formed penetrating at a position facing the first irregular reflection portion 353d of the winning member 353, and a solenoid 356. It is mainly provided with a through-hole 354c that is formed so as to penetrate at a position facing the transmission portion 356a.

  The opening 354a is an opening for directly irradiating the light emitted from the LED 355a of the light emitting member 355 to the first irregular reflection portion 353d of the winning member 353, and has a substantially same rectangle as the outer shape of the first irregular reflection portion 353d in front view. The opening is formed at a position facing the first irregular reflection portion 353d.

  The second irregular reflection portion 354b is an irregular reflection surface that irregularly reflects light emitted from the LED 355a of the light emitting member 355 disposed on the back side and emits it forward, and is formed of a transparent flexible material and includes a plurality of Unevenness is formed. Thereby, by making the light emitted from the LED 355a of the light emitting member 355 incident on the plurality of irregularities, the traveling direction of the light emitted from the front side of the second irregular reflection part 354b is dispersed, and the second irregular reflection part 354b is made efficient. Can emit light well.

  The through-hole 354c is an opening through which the transmission part 356a of the solenoid 356 is inserted from the back side to the front side, and is formed in a vertically long rectangle larger than the outer shape of the transmission part 356a in front view, and the transmission part 356a of the solenoid 356 It penetrates and is formed in the position which opposes.

  The light emitting member 355 is mounted with an LED 355a of light emitting means for irradiating light on the front side (side facing the decorative member 354), and is attached to the back side of the decorative member 354. Thereby, light can be irradiated to the 1st irregular reflection part 353d and the 2nd irregular reflection part 354b.

  The solenoid 356 includes a transmission unit 356 a that transmits a driving force to the variable plate 352. As described above, the solenoid 356 is a driving unit that applies a rotational driving force to the variable plate 352, and the transmission unit 356a is displaced in the direction of gravity when electric power is applied.

  The transmission part 356a is inserted between the through hole 353e of the winning member 353 and the through hole 354c of the decoration member 354, and is disposed between the first protrusion 352b and the second protrusion 352c of the variable plate 352. Therefore, when the transmission part 356a is displaced, the variable plate 352 is rotated around the axis of the shaft part 352a.

  Next, the displacement state of the variable plate 352 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. FIG. 28A to FIG. 28C are cross-sectional views of the rear member 350 taken along the line XXVIII-XXVIII in FIG. FIG. 29A to FIG. 29C are cross-sectional views of the rear member 350. 28A and 29A show the variable plate 352 in the first rotation state, and FIGS. 28B and 29B show the variable plate 352 in the second rotation state in FIG. FIG. 29C shows the variable plate 352 in the third rotation state. Further, FIGS. 29A to 29C correspond to the cross section of FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 28A, in the first rotation state where the transmission portion 356a of the solenoid 356 is positioned below the gravity direction, the transmission portion 356a abuts on one side of the second protrusion 352c of the variable plate 352, and the first The other side of the two protrusions 352c is in contact with the back side of the back body 351. That is, the second protrusion 352c is sandwiched between the transmission portion 356a and the back main body portion 351. As a result, it is possible to suppress the variable plate 352 from rotating and displacing around the axis of the shaft portion 352a.

  As shown in FIG. 29A, in the variable plate 352 in the first rotation state, the bulging portion 352d1 is positioned on the upper side in the gravity direction with respect to the shaft portion 352a, and the front portion 352d2 is the opening of the rear body portion 351. 351b is covered (closed). In this case, the shortest distance dimension L1 between the end surface of the opening 351b on the upper side in the gravity direction and the variable plate 352 is set smaller than the diameter of the sphere. As a result, the game balls sent between the intermediate member 330 and the back main body portion 351 are not sent into the opening 351b, but are brought into a flow-down state in front of the variable plate 352.

  In the first rotation state, the front portion 352d2 is inclined forward as it separates from the shaft portion 352a, and the tip portion of the bulging portion 352d1 is positioned on the front plane of the back body portion 351. .

  28 (a) and 29 (a), power is applied to the solenoid 356, the transmission part 356a is displaced upward in the direction of gravity, and the transmission part 356a is displaced by half of the total displacement. In the second rotation state shown in FIG. 28B and FIG. 29B, the transmission portion 356a abuts on the first projection 352b of the variable plate 352 and rotates the first projection 352b around the axis of the shaft portion 352a. Thereby, the variable plate 352 is rotated around the axis of the shaft portion 352a.

  As shown in FIG. 29B, in the variable plate 352 in the second rotation state, the bulging portion 352d1 is positioned on the front side with respect to the shaft portion 352a, and the front portion 352d2 is inclined upward to the front side. Is made smaller than that in the first rotation state. In this case, the shortest distance dimension L2 between the end surface of the opening 351b on the upper side in the gravity direction and the variable plate 352 is set smaller than the diameter of the sphere.

  FIG. 28B is a diagram in which power is continuously applied to the solenoid 356 from the state shown in FIG. 28B and FIG. 29B, the transmission unit 356a is displaced upward in the direction of gravity, and the transmission unit 356a is displaced to the end. In the third rotation state shown in FIG. 28C and FIG. 29C, the transmission portion 356a abuts on the first projection 352b of the variable plate 352 and further rotates the first projection 352b around the axis of the shaft portion 352a. Thereby, the variable plate 352 is further rotated around the axis of the shaft portion 352a than in the second rotation state.

  As shown in FIG. 28C, in the third rotation state, the transmission portion 356a and one end of the first protrusion 352b are in contact with each other, and the intermediate member 330 and the other end of the first protrusion 352b are in contact with each other. The That is, the first protrusion 352b is sandwiched between the back main body portion 351 and the transmission portion 356a. As a result, it is possible to suppress the variable plate 352 from rotating and displacing around the axis of the shaft portion 352a.

  As shown in FIG. 29C, in the variable plate 352 in the third rotation state, the bulging portion 352d1 is positioned on the front side with respect to the shaft portion 352a. In this case, the shortest distance dimension L3 between the end surface of the opening 351b on the upper side in the gravity direction and the variable plate 352 is set larger than the diameter of the sphere. As a result, the game ball that is sent between the intermediate member 330 and the back body portion 351 is sent into the opening 351b.

  Further, in the third rotation state, the opposite surface of the front portion 352d2 is inclined upward as it is separated from the shaft portion 352a. Therefore, a game ball sent to the upper side of the plate portion 352d can be sent to the inside of the opening 351b of the back body portion 351.

  Therefore, the distance between the first irregular reflection part 353d and the light emitting means is made larger than the distance between the second irregular reflection part 354b and the light emitting means, and the distance between the variable plate 352 and the second irregular reflection part 354b is a game. Since it is the first flow path of the sphere, the unit composed of the variable plate 352, the first irregular reflection portion 353d, and the second irregular reflection portion 354b can be reduced in size. In other words, the space between the variable plate 352 and the second irregularly reflecting portion 354b formed to vary the form of light visually recognized by the player is used as the first flow path of the game ball, thereby making the dead space effective. It is not necessary to secure a separate space for the flow path. Therefore, the unit can be reduced in size accordingly.

  Next, the intermediate member 330 and the rear member 350 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 30 and 31. FIG. 30A is a front view of the intermediate member 330 and the rear member 350, and FIG. 30B is a side view of the intermediate member 330 and the rear member 350. FIG. 31A is a cross-sectional view of the intermediate member 330 and the rear member 350 taken along the line XXXIa-XXIa of FIG. 30A, and FIG. 31B is the middle taken along the line XXXIb-XXXIb of FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view of a member 330 and a rear member 350. FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 30 and 31, the distance dimension L4 between the facing of the LED 355a and the second irregular reflection part 354b is set smaller than the distance dimension L5 between the facing of the LED 355a and the first irregular reflection part 353d (L4). <L5). In addition, the variable plate 352 is disposed in the light transmission direction of the second irregular reflection portion 354b.

  Here, a gaming machine is known that includes a displacement member (variable plate 352) that is displaceably disposed at a position that can be visually recognized by a player and that switches a flow path of a game ball in accordance with the displacement position. In this case, the displacement member is arranged on the front side of the transparent member formed of a transparent flexible material, and the player is able to irradiate light from the back surface of the transparent member, so that the displacement member is combined with the light transmitted through the transparent member. There is also known a technique of making a user visually recognize and pay attention to a displacement member. However, in the conventional technology described above, since the displacement member is formed of a non-transmissive material that does not transmit light, the area (area) of light that is visually recognized by the player is reduced by the size of the displacement member, The production effect is hindered.

  In response to this, by forming the displacement member (variable plate 352) from a transparent flexible material, in addition to the transmission member, the light transmitted through the displacement member can be visually recognized by the player, and the light to be visually recognized by the player can be seen. A technology for securing a region (area) has been developed (unknown at the time of this application). However, it has been found that when the displacement member is made of a transparent flexible material, it is difficult for the player to specify the position of the displacement member.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, a substrate member (light emitting member 355) on which one or a plurality of light emitting means (LEDs 355a) formed to emit light is mounted with the light emitting surface facing the front side, The first transmissive member (first irregular reflection portion 353d) and the second transmissive member (second irregular reflection portion 354b) which are disposed on the front side of the substrate member and are formed of a light transmissive material, and the displacement member is transparent and flexible. The distance between the second transmission member and the substrate member is different from the distance between the first transmission member and the substrate member. Since it is set, it is possible to make it easier for the player to specify the position of the displacement member while securing a light region (area) to be visually recognized by the player.

  That is, since the distance from the light emitting means (LED 355a) is different between the first transmission member (first irregular reflection part 353d) and the second transmission member (second irregular reflection part 354b), the first transmission member and the second transmission member are respectively It is possible to vary the mode of diffusion of light during transmission. Therefore, the mode of the light transmitted through the first transmission member and visually recognized by the player can be made different from the mode of the light transmitted through the second transmission member and visually recognized by the player. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to specify the position of the displacement member (variable plate 352) disposed on the front side of the second transmission member.

  Here, the light emitting member 355, the first irregular reflection portion 353d and the second irregular reflection portion 354b formed of a transparent flexible material on the light irradiation side of the light emitting member 355 (LED 355a), and the game area flow down. In a gaming machine provided with a variable plate 352 that guides the game ball to either the first pitching route KR1 or the second pitching route KR2, in order to make the variable plate 352 easily recognized by the player, the second light emitting member It is necessary to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the position of the variable plate 352 by changing the color of light of the second light emitting member or changing the irradiation angle. For this reason, there is a problem in that the number of parts increases and the manufacturing process becomes complicated because the second light emitting member is provided.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, the distance dimension L4 between the facing of the light emitting member 355 (LED 355a) and the second irregular reflection part 354b is different from the distance dimension L5 between the facing of the LED 355a and the first irregular reflection part 353d. And a variable plate 352 is disposed in front of the second irregular reflection portion 354b. Thereby, since the aspect (amount) of the light emitted from the first irregular reflection part 353d and the second irregular reflection part 354b can be made different, the visibility of the variable plate 352 from the player can be improved.

  That is, as the first irregular reflection portion 353d disposed farther from the light emitting member 355, the amount of transmitted light decreases as the light of the LED 355a of the light emitting member 355 diffuses outward, the first irregular reflection portion 353d and Since the second irregular reflection part 354b is disposed at different distances from the light emitting means, the light intensity transmitted through the first irregular reflection part 353d and the second irregular reflection part 354b is changed to the first irregular reflection part 353d and It can be made different by the second irregular reflection portion 354b. Therefore, the player can recognize the variable plate 352 disposed on the light transmission side by the brightness of light.

  Therefore, the player can recognize each of the variable plate 352 and the periphery of the variable plate 352 by light emission from one light emitting member 355 without newly arranging a second light emitting member. As a result, it is not necessary to newly provide a second light emitting member, and the manufacturing process can be simplified by suppressing an increase in the number of parts.

  Further, since the first irregular reflection part 353d and the second irregular reflection part 354b are uneven on the back side, the light transmitted from the LED 355a and transmitted through the first irregular reflection part 353d and the second irregular reflection part 354b is caused by the irregularities. Easy to diffuse. In this case, since the distance from the LED 355a is different between the first irregular reflection part 353d and the second irregular reflection part 354b, the diffusion mode of the light transmitted through the first irregular reflection part 353d and the diffusion of the light transmitted through the second irregular reflection part 354b. It is possible to differ from the embodiment. Therefore, the difference between the aspect of the light transmitted through the first irregular reflection part 353d and visually recognized by the player and the aspect of the light transmitted through the second irregular reflection part 354b and visually recognized by the player can be further increased. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to specify the position of the variable plate 352 disposed on the front side of the second irregular reflection portion 354b.

  In addition, since the unevenness formed in the first irregular reflection part 353d and the unevenness formed in the second irregular reflection part 354b are substantially the same, in the state where light is not emitted from the LED 355a, the first irregular reflection part 353d and the first irregular reflection part 353d The player can visually recognize the two irregular reflection portions 354b (the second irregular reflection portion 354b visually recognized through the variable plate 352) as the same appearance. That is, the first irregular reflection portion 353d and the second irregular reflection portion 354b, which have different appearances (light modes) after the LED 355a emits light, can have the same appearance before the LED 355a emits light. It is possible to enhance the effect that the appearance (light mode) of the second irregular reflection part 354b is different (different).

  Even if the first irregular reflection part 353d and the second irregular reflection part 354b have the same unevenness, the first irregular reflection part 353d and the second irregular reflection part 354b have different distances from the LED 355a. It is possible to change the diffusion mode of light when passing through the second irregular reflection portions 354b. That is, the mode of the light that is transmitted through the first irregular reflection portion 353d and visually recognized by the player can be different from the mode of the light that is transmitted through the second irregular reflection portion 354b and visually recognized by the player.

  Further, since the variable plate 352 can be disposed at a position that is substantially flush with the first irregular reflection portion 353d, the variable plate 352 and the first irregular reflection portion 353d can be visually recognized integrally, and light is emitted from the LED 355a. The area (area) of the light to be visually recognized can be visually recognized as a larger area.

  Further, a standing wall 353f standing on the decoration member 354 side is formed at the edge of the first irregular reflection portion 353d of the winning member 353, and a tip surface on the lower end side of the standing wall 353f is formed on the edge of the decoration member 354. It arrange | positions in contact with the end of the 2nd irregular reflection part 354b. Thereby, the light of the LED 355a of the light emitting member 355 that transmits the second irregular reflection part 354b is prevented from entering the first irregular reflection part 353d, and the light intensity of the first irregular reflection part 353d and the second irregular reflection part 354b is reduced. Can be larger.

  That is, out of the light transmitted through the second irregular reflection portion 354b disposed in the vicinity of the light emitting member 355, the light traveling toward the first irregular reflection portion 353d disposed far from the light emitting member 355 enters the standing wall 353f. By doing so, it is difficult to enter the first irregular reflection portion 353d, and the brightness of the light of the first irregular reflection portion 353d and the second irregular reflection portion 354b can be further increased. Therefore, the player can easily recognize the variable plate 352 and each of the surroundings of the variable plate 352 by light emission from one light emitting unit.

  In other words, since it has the standing wall 353f that connects the first irregular reflection part 353d and the second irregular reflection part 354b, one of the first irregular reflection part 353d or the second irregular reflection part 354b (the distance between the LED 355a is the distance). By the standing wall 353ff, the light transmitted through the smaller diffuser enters the space between the LED 355a and the other of the first diffusely reflected portion 353d or the second diffusely reflected portion 354b (which has a larger distance from the LED 355a). Can be suppressed. As a result, the first diffused reflection part 353d and the second diffused reflection part 354b can easily make different modes of light (particularly light and dark) that pass through them and are visually recognized by the player. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to specify the position of the displacement member disposed on the front side of the second irregular reflection portion 354b.

  In addition, since the unevenness is not formed on the back surface of the standing wall 353f, the first irregular reflection portion 353d and the second irregular reflection portion 354b (the second irregular reflection portion 354b that is visible through the variable plate 352) stand upright. The player can visually recognize the installation wall 353f as a different appearance. Accordingly, the boundary between the first transmission member and the second irregular reflection portion 354b can be clarified using the standing wall 353f, and as a result, the variable plate 352 disposed on the front side of the second irregular reflection portion 354b. This makes it easier for the player to specify the position.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the distance between the first irregular reflection part 353d and the LED 355a is made larger than the distance between the second irregular reflection part 354b and the LED 355a, and the first irregular reflection part 353d is arranged on the upper side in the gravity direction. Can be prevented from being damaged.

  That is, on the side where the distance to the LED 355a is small (narrow), the temperature in the space becomes high due to the heat generated from the LED 355a, and there is a high possibility that the LED 355a is damaged. On the other hand, the air in which the temperature in the space on the side where the distance from the LED 355a is small (narrow) is high is changed to a space located above the gravity direction (that is, the distance between the LED 355a is large (wide). ) Side space) and can escape. As a result, breakage of the LED 355a on the side where the distance is small (narrow) can be suppressed.

  In the present embodiment, a space through the opening 354a of the decorative member 354 is formed between the first irregular reflection portion 353d and the light emitting member 355 (LED 355a). Thereby, the heat accompanying light irradiation of the LED 355a of the light emitting member 355 can be released between the first irregular reflection portion 353d and the LED 355a facing each other. Accordingly, heat can be prevented from being accumulated in the light emitting member 355. As a result, the light emitting member 355 can be prevented from being damaged.

  That is, the first irregular reflection part 353d is set to have a larger distance dimension between the facing of the light emitting member 355 than the second diffuse reflecting part 354b, and thus moves the air between the facing of the first irregular reflection part 353d and the light emitting member 355. It can be done easily. Thereby, the air between the opposing surfaces of the first irregular reflection part 353d and the light emitting member 355 can be moved, and the heat of the light emitting member 355 can be released to the outside. In addition, since the warmed air is likely to rise, the first irregular reflection portion 353d that increases the distance between the light emitting member 355 and the facing is disposed on the upper side in the gravity direction, so that the air warmed by the light emitting member 355 can be efficiently removed. The light emitting member 355 can be efficiently cooled by discharging to the outside. As a result, the light emitting member 355 can be prevented from being damaged.

  Since the variable plate 352 includes the bulging portion 352d1, it is possible to shade the light transmitted through the variable plate 352 and allow the player to recognize that the variable plate 352 has been displaced due to the displacement of the shadow of the light.

  That is, the bulging portion 352d1 is formed to bulge in a semicircular shape on the light transmission side, so that the traveling direction of the light emitted from the variable plate 352 can be partially changed. As a result, among the light transmitted through the variable plate 352 and emitted to the player side, the amount of light emitted from the bulging portion 352d1 can be reduced, and the light transmitted through the variable plate can be shaded. . Further, since the bulging portion 352d1 is formed at the end portion far from the shaft portion 352a of the variable plate 352, the shadow of the light irradiated to the player side can be displaced in accordance with the displacement of the variable plate 352. . As a result, the player can recognize the displacement of the variable plate 352 by visually recognizing the displacement of the shadow of the light emitted from the variable plate 352.

  In other words, the variable plate 352 is formed as a plate-like body whose base end side is rotatably supported, and a bulging portion 352d1 having a large plate thickness is formed on the distal end side. Of the light that passes through and is visually recognized by the player, the light that passes through the bulging portion 352d1 and is visible to the player, and the light that passes through other portions except the bulging portion 352d1 and is visible to the player Can be different. Further, as the variable plate 352 is rotated around the base end side, the position of the light that is visible through the distal end side (the bulging portion 352d1) can be displaced. That is, it is easy for the player to recognize the displacement (rotation) operation of the variable plate 352 by utilizing the displacement of the position of the light that is visible through the front end side (the bulging portion 352d1) of the variable plate 352. it can.

  Furthermore, since the bulging portion 352d1 is formed with a curved cross section, the bulging portion 352d1 functions as a lens (that is, the light incident on the bulging portion 352d1 is refracted or diverged). (In this embodiment, the light incident on the bulging portion 352d1 is converged so that the light is visually recognized as light on a line with increased intensity (brightness)). As a result, out of the light that passes through the variable plate 352 and is visually recognized by the player, the light that passes through the bulging portion 352d1 and is visible to the player, and the other portions except the bulging portion 352d1 are transmitted. The difference from the light visually recognized by the player can be made clearer. As a result, the player can easily recognize the displacement (rotation) operation of the variable plate 352.

  The base portion of the receiving portion 331a of the intermediate member 330 is set so that the height position in the gravity direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 31A) is substantially the same as the center position in the gravity direction of the variable plate 352 in the first rotation state. Is done.

  The first pitching path KR1 is connected to the third pitching path KR3 inside the second recess 351e of the back body 351 disposed on the outer side in the left-right direction of the outer guide part 331b2 of the intermediate member 330. The second pitching path KR2 is connected to a fourth pitching path KR4 formed between the inner guide part 331b1 and the outer guide part 331b2 of the intermediate member 330.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 32 to FIG. 43, a description will be given of a game ball that is sent from the first pitch route KR1 to the fourth pitch route KR4. 32 to 34 are cross-sectional views of the intermediate member 330 and the rear member 350.

  32 to 34 and FIGS. 38 to 40 correspond to the cross section of FIG. 31A, and FIGS. 35 to 37 and FIGS. 41 to 43 correspond to the cross section of FIG. 31B. FIGS. 32 to 34 and FIGS. 35 to 37 illustrate transition states of game balls that are sent through the first pitching route KR1 and the third pitching route KR3. FIGS. 38 to 40 and FIGS. Then, the transition state of the game balls sent through the second pitching route KR2 and the fourth pitching route KR4 is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 32 and 35, when the variable plate 352 of the rear member 350 is in the first rotation state, the game ball that is sent by rolling on the upper portion of the receiving portion 331a of the intermediate member 330 is the first throwing ball. The ball is sent to the route KR1. In other words, the game ball that rolls and moves on the upper portion of the receiving portion 331 a of the intermediate member 330 flows down into a gap between the intermediate member 330 and the back main body portion 351.

  From the state shown in FIGS. 32 and 35, the game ball flowing down the first pitching path KR1 flows down to the upper surface of the outer guide part 331b2 of the intermediate member 330, and as shown in FIGS. 33 and 36, the outer guide part 331b2 Is rolled onto the third pitching path KR3. Note that, as described above, the outer guide portion 331b2 is formed so as to descend downward from the central portion in the left-right direction, so that the game ball flowing down the left side of the first pitching path KR1 is the left side when viewed from the front. The game balls that are sent to the third pitching route KR3 and flow down the right side of the first pitching route KR1 are sent to the third pitching route KR3 on the right side.

  The game balls sent to the third pitching path KR3 from the state shown in FIGS. 33 and 36 flow down the third pitching path KR3 and pass through the back base 390 described later, as shown in FIGS. To the variable unit 360.

  As shown in FIGS. 38 and 41, when the variable plate 352 of the rear member 350 is in the third rotation state, the game ball that is sent by rolling on the upper portion of the receiving portion 331a of the intermediate member 330 is the second throwing ball. The ball is sent to the route KR2. In other words, the game ball that is rolled by the upper part of the receiving part 331a of the intermediate member 330 rolls on the upper part of the variable plate 352 of the rear member 350 and is sent to the second pitching path KR2.

  From the state shown in FIG. 38 and FIG. 41, the game ball flowing down the third pitching path KR3 passes through the inside of the second detection hole 353b of the winning member 353, and as shown in FIG. 39 and FIG. It is discharged from 353c and sent to the fourth pitching route KR4.

  In this case, as described above, the base portion of the receiving portion 331a of the intermediate member 330 has a height position in the gravity direction (a vertical direction in FIG. 31 (a)) that is substantially the center position in the gravity direction of the variable plate 352 in the first rotation state. Since they are set at substantially the same height position, the first pitching path KR1 flowing down between the intermediate member 330 and the back body part 351 and the second pitching path KR2 that feeds the inside of the opening 351b of the back body part 351. The distance dimension in the gravity direction of the intermediate member 330 and the rear member 350 when the path is changed while the variable plate 352 is displaced can be reduced.

  That is, when the game ball rolling on the receiving portion 331a of the intermediate member 330 is distributed to the first pitching path KR1 and the second pitching path KR2 by the variable plate 352 provided on the back side, the variable in the third state. By setting the end portion of the plate 352 far from the shaft portion 352a to be lower than the base portion of the receiving portion 331a, the disposition position of the variable plate 352 can be increased in the direction of gravity. As a result, the distance dimension in the gravity direction between the intermediate member 330 and the rear member 350 can be reduced.

  From the state shown in FIG. 39 and FIG. 42, the game ball sent to the fourth pitching route KR4 is placed on the upper surface of the inner guide portion 331b1 of the intermediate member 330 of the fourth pitching route KR4 as shown in FIGS. The ball is rolled and sent to a round transfer ball unit 370 to be described later. Note that, as described above, the inner guide portion 331b1 is formed to be inclined downward as it goes outward from the central portion in the left-right direction. Therefore, in a front view, the sphere (on the left side) flows down the left side of the second pitching path KR2. A ball passing through the second detection hole 353b and discharged from the left front opening 353c) is sent to the left fourth throwing path KR4 and flows down the right side of the second throwing path KR2 (right second detection hole). Sphere passing through 353b and discharged from the right front opening 353c) is sent to the right fourth pitching path KR4.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 44 to FIG. 51, a description will be given of the game balls that roll on the receiving portion 331a of the intermediate member 330 and are sent to the first pitching route KR1 and the second pitching route KR2. 44 and 45 are cross-sectional views of the intermediate member 330 and the rear member 350. FIG. 44 and 45 correspond to the cross section of FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 44 and 45, the game ball that is sent by rolling on the upper surface of the receiving portion 331a of the intermediate member 330 rolls to the rear side and comes into contact with the variable plate 352 to contact the first pitching path KR1. Is sent to.

  In this case, as described above, the variable plate 352 in the first rotation state is disposed such that the front portion 352d2 is tilted forward as it is separated from the shaft portion 352a, and thus the receiving portion 331a moves to the first pitching path KR1. The game ball to be sent can collide with the front portion 352d2 and easily flow down.

  In addition, the portion connected to the front portion 351d2 of the bulging portion 352d1 is positioned above the base end of the receiving portion 331a by the radius of the game ball, so when the ball rolls vigorously on the receiving portion 331a. The ball can collide with the bulging portion 352d1 and can flow downward. At this time, the game ball having a relatively high momentum for ball feeding is caused to collide with the bulging portion 352d1 that bulges from the plate portion 352d, so that the breakage of the plate portion 352d can be suppressed. That is, when the rolling speed of the sphere is relatively high, the plate portion 352d can be prevented from being damaged by colliding with the bulging portion 352d1 having high rigidity for the amount of bulging.

  Next, when the variable plate 352 is displaced from the first rotation state to the third rotation state with reference to FIGS. 46 to 51, the ball rolls on the upper surface of the receiving portion 331 a of the intermediate member 330 and is sent. Will be described. 46 to 51 are cross-sectional views of the intermediate member 330 and the rear member 350. 46 to 48 and FIGS. 49 to 51 correspond to the cross section of FIG. 46 to 48 and FIGS. 49 to 51 illustrate the rolling state of the game ball when the variable plate 352 is displaced from the first rotation state to the third rotation state.

  Here, as described above, when the end portion far from the shaft portion 352a of the variable plate 352 is set lower than the base portion of the receiving portion 331a in the third state, the base portion of the receiving portion 331a and the variable plate 352 during the displacement operation There was a possibility that a game ball could be caught between them, causing problems.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 46 and 49, the base portion of the receiving portion 331a of the intermediate member 330 has a height position in the gravity direction (vertical direction in FIG. 31 (a)) in the first rotation state. Is set at a height position substantially the same as the center position in the gravity direction of the variable plate 352, so that the game ball and the bulging portion when the variable plate 352 in the middle of displacement sandwiches the game ball between the receiving portion 331a The contact position with 352d1 can be either the front side or the back side of the game ball divided by a virtual line S2 connecting the base end of the receiving portion 331a and the center of the game ball, and the ball is the receiving portion. It is possible to suppress pinching between the base portion of 331a and the variable plate 352.

  That is, as shown in FIGS. 46 to 48, when the front side of the game ball divided by the virtual line S2 comes into contact with the bulging portion 352d1, the connection side of the bulging portion 352d1 with the front portion 352d2 is the game side. Collide with a sphere. Therefore, using the curved surface of the bulging portion 352d1, it is possible to send a ball to the first pitching route KR1, as shown in FIG.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 49 to 51, when the back side of the game ball divided by the virtual line S2 and the bulging portion 352d1 are in contact with each other, the side of the bulging portion 352d1 on the side away from the shaft portion 352a. It abuts on the curved surface. Thereby, the game ball about to fall from the receiving portion 331a can be pushed back to the front side using the displacement of the variable plate 352. Thereby, the variable plate 352 is displaced to the third rotation state, and the ball can be guided to the second pitching path KR2.

  Next, the back base 390 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 52 to 54. 52A is a front view of the back base 390, and FIG. 52B is a side view of the back base 390. FIG. FIG. 53 is an exploded front perspective view of the back base 390. 54 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rear base 390. FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 52 to 54, the back surface base 390 is disposed between the back plate 391 of the plate-like body disposed on the back surface and the back plate 391 disposed at one end on the lower side in the gravity direction of the back surface plate 391. A holding member 392 for holding the solenoid 397 of the driving means, two annular members 394 fastened to both ends of the holding member 392, and a stopper disposed on the outer side between the two annular members 394 facing each other. A portion 396 is mainly provided.

  The back plate 391 is formed from a plate-like body that is substantially trapezoidal in front view. The rear plate 391 is a plate that covers the rear side of the rear member 350 described above, and is formed to have an outer shape that is substantially the same as the outer shape of the rear member 350 in a front view.

  The solenoid 397 is a driving unit that applies a driving force to a stopper unit 396 described later, and includes a transmission unit 397 a that transmits the driving force to the stopper unit 396. The solenoids 397 are disposed on the back side of the two stopper portions 396, respectively.

  The transmission portion 397a is a protrusion that is displaced in the direction of gravity when electric power is supplied to the solenoid 397, and is inserted between a first engagement portion 396a and a second engagement portion 396b of a stopper portion 396 described later. .

  The holding member 392 is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and includes a recess 392a that is recessed at the front side at both ends in the longitudinal direction, and an opening 392b that is formed through the recess 392a from the front to the back. It is formed.

  The recess 392a is a recess into which the solenoid 397 is inserted, and is recessed in the outer shape of the solenoid 397. Therefore, by attaching the holding member 392 to the back plate 391 after inserting the solenoid 397 into the recess 392a, the solenoid 397 can be held so as not to fall off.

  The opening 392b is an opening through which the transmission part 397a of the solenoid 397 is inserted forward, and is formed in an opening that is larger than the transmission part 397a and has a rectangular shape in front view. Therefore, when the solenoid 397 is disposed inside the recess 392a, the transmission portion 397a of the solenoid 397 protrudes to the front side.

  The annular member 394 is a ball feeding portion through which game balls are fed from the third ball feeding path KR3, and is formed in a substantially annular shape when viewed from the side, and includes a shaft support hole 394a penetrating the shaft center. The shaft support hole 394a is a hole that rotatably holds a shaft B1, which will be described later, and is formed with an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft B1.

  The shaft B1 is formed in a columnar shape, and one end is inserted into the shaft support hole 394a of the annular member 394 as described above, and the other end is externally fitted into a shaft hole 396c of a stopper portion 396 described later. Therefore, the shaft B1 can be rotationally displaced with respect to the shaft support hole 394a with the rotational displacement of the stopper portion 396.

  The stopper portion 396 is a pitching path blocking means that disables pitching of a pitching path KR6 of the variable unit 460, which will be described later, by being rotationally displaced. The stopper section 396 is formed in a substantially triangular shape when viewed from the side, and is between the two annular members 394 facing each other. Arranged outside.

  The stopper portion 396 includes a shaft hole 396c that penetrates in a substantially circular shape in the axial direction of the annular member 394, and a first engagement portion 396a and a second engagement portion that project radially outward from the shaft of the shaft hole 396c. The portion 396b is mainly provided.

  The first engagement portion 396a is a protrusion that engages with the transmission portion 397a of the solenoid 397 described above to transmit the driving force of the solenoid 397, and is disposed on the upper side in the gravity direction of the transmission portion 397a. .

  Similar to the first engagement portion 396a, the second engagement portion 396b is a protrusion that engages with the transmission portion 397a of the solenoid 397 to transmit the driving force of the solenoid 397, and is below the gravity direction of the transmission member 397b. Located on the side.

  The first engaging portion 396a and the second engaging portion 396b are formed with a predetermined gap around the shaft hole 396c, and the distance between the projecting tips is determined by the transmission of the solenoid 397. It is set larger than the vertical dimension of the portion 397a. Thereby, the transmission part 397a of the solenoid 397 can be inserted between the first engagement part 396a and the second engagement part 396b, and the driving force can be transmitted to the stopper part 396.

  Next, transition of the stopper portion 396 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 55A to FIG. 55C are cross-sectional views of the back surface base 390 taken along the line LV-LV in FIG. 55A to 55C, the transition state of the stopper portion 396 is illustrated. In FIG. 55, the end portion far from the shaft hole 396c of the stopper portion 396 will be described with reference to the end portion A2.

  As shown in FIG. 55A, in the first shut-off state where the transmission portion 397a of the solenoid 397 is positioned below, the transmission portion 397a contacts the second engagement portion 396b of the stopper portion 396, and the stopper portion 396 A driving force is applied in a direction in which the end A2 of the first end is displaced upward (in FIG. 55A, the end A2 rotates clockwise around the axis of the shaft hole 396c). Thus, the end A2 is positioned above the shaft hole 396c in the gravity direction.

  From the state shown in FIG. 55 (a), the transmission part 397a of the solenoid 397 is displaced upward, and the transmission part 397a shown in FIG. 55 (b) is displaced to the middle position of the total displacement amount. The portion 397a comes into contact with the first engaging portion 396a of the stopper portion 396, and the end portion A2 of the stopper portion 396 is displaced downward (in FIG. 55 (b), the end portion A2 is arranged around the shaft hole 396c. A driving force is applied in the direction of left rotation. As a result, the end portion A2 is closer to the shaft hole 396c in the gravity direction than in the first blocking state.

  From the state shown in FIG. 55 (b), the transmission part 397a of the solenoid 397 is further displaced upward, and in the third cutoff state where the transmission part 397a shown in FIG. The end A2 of the stopper 396 is displaced downward by coming into contact with the first engagement portion 396a of the stopper 396 (in FIG. 55B, the end A2 rotates counterclockwise around the axis of the shaft hole 396c). A driving force is applied in the direction. In this case, the end A2 is displaced to a height position substantially the same as the height of the shaft hole 396c in the direction of gravity.

  On the other hand, when displacing from the third cutoff state to the first cutoff state, the transmission portion 397a of the solenoid 397 pushes the second engagement portion 396b downward, so that the tip end portion A1 is pushed up around the shaft hole 396c. It is done.

  Next, the main body 380 of the variable unit 360 will be described with reference to FIGS. 56 to 58. 56A is a front view of the variable unit 360, and FIG. 56B is a top view of the variable unit 360. FIG. 57 is an exploded front perspective view of the main body 380 of the variable unit 360. 58 is an exploded rear perspective view of the main body 380 of the variable unit 360. FIG.

  The variable unit 360 includes a main body 380 having a path for sending the game balls sent from the third ball feeding path KR3 and the fourth ball feeding path KR4 to the front side, and a rotating rotator to attract the game balls to the game balls. It is mainly provided with a round transfer ball portion 370 for sending a ball.

  The main body 380 is disposed on the back surface on the lower side in the gravity direction of the center frame 310 described above, and is visible to the player through the central opening of the center frame 310 (see FIG. 8). The main body 380 includes an upper surface base 381 on which a rolling surface of a game ball is formed on the upper surface, a first lower surface base 383 disposed to face the upper surface base 381, and the upper surface base 381 and the first lower surface base 383. V winning member 382 that is pivotally disposed at one end between the first driving motor M1, a first driving motor M1 that applies a driving force to the V winning member 382, and a driving force of the first driving motor M1. A first transmission means 384 for transmitting to the V winning member 382, a distributing portion 389 rotatably disposed on the main body 380, a second drive motor M2 for applying a driving force to the distributing portion 389, and The second transmission means 387 for transmitting the driving force of the second drive motor M2 to the distributing unit 389 is mainly provided.

  As described above, the upper surface base 381 is a plate member having a rolling surface to which game balls sent from the third ball feeding path KR3 and the fourth ball feeding path KR4 are sent, and is formed from a plate-like body having a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from above. It is formed. The upper surface base 381 includes two first rolling parts 381a that are recessed from the back side to the front side, and a standing part 381b that stands up to surround the back side of the first rolling part 381a. A second rolling part 381c that is branched and recessed from the center part in the front-rear direction of the rolling part 381a, and a second part that is formed at a position sandwiching the rotating bodies 372R and 372L on the front side of the second rolling part 381c. A third rolling part 381d, a fourth rolling part 381e formed adjacent to the third rolling part 381d and connected to the first rolling part 381a, and a base part side of the second rolling part 381c. It is mainly provided with a shaft support hole 381f opened in the direction of dynamic gravity at a position sandwiching the first rolling portion 381a.

  The first rolling portion 381a is a pitching route through which a game ball sent through the fourth pitching route KR4 is sent. The first rolling portion 381a faces the front side from the rear end where the game ball is sent from the fourth pitching route KR4. It is formed to be inclined downward. As a result, a fifth pitching path KR5 is formed for pitching the game balls sent on the fourth pitching path KR4 to the front side.

  Further, as described above, the fourth pitching path KR4 is divided into two in the left-right direction, and the first rolling portion 381a is formed on the lower side in the gravity direction of the second fourth pitching path KR4. Thereby, each 4th pitching path | route KR4 is connected with each 5th pitching path | route KR5.

  Each of the second first rolling portions 381a extends to the front side, and merges before being connected to the fourth rolling portion 381e to form one rolling surface.

  The standing portion 381b is a wall that guides the game ball sent from the fourth pitching route KR4 to the first rolling portion 381a, and the standing tip portion (the upper end portion in the gravity direction) is the intermediate member 330 described above. Is disposed in contact with the guide portion 330b. Thereby, the game ball flowing down the fourth pitching route KR4 can be reliably sent to the fifth pitching route KR5 of the first rolling part 381a.

  The second rolling portion 381c is a surface that extends from the substantially central position of the first rolling portion 381a that extends from the back side to the front side, and extends outside the upper surface base 381. The first rolling portion 381a In addition, it is formed so as to be inclined downward toward the outside of the upper surface base 381. Therefore, a game ball that rolls on the upper side of the first rolling part 381a and is sent to the front side can collide with a sorting part 389, which will be described later, and be sent to the second rolling part 381c.

  Further, as described above, the second rolling portion 381c is formed so as to be inclined downward toward the outer side in the left-right direction, so that the game ball sent to the second rolling portion 381c is from the first rolling portion 381a. Rolled in the direction of separation and sent. That is, the second rolling portion 381c forms a sixth pitching path KR6 through which a ball is pitched.

  The second rolling portion 381c is formed in a shape in which the center position in the direction orthogonal to the extending direction is recessed, and the game ball rolling on the second rolling portion 381c is hardly shaken. Thereby, it is possible to stabilize the game ball sent through the sixth pitching route KR6.

  The third rolling portion 381d is a surface that receives a game ball sent by a rotating body 372R, 372L, which will be described later, and is formed adjacent to the rotating bodies 372R, 372L, and the fourth rolling portion 381e (front side). It is formed so as to be inclined downward. Therefore, the game balls sent from the rotating bodies 372R and 372L to the upper surface of the third rolling part 381d roll on the upper surface of the third rolling part 381d and are sent to the fourth rolling part 381e. That is, the third rolling part 381d forms a seventh pitching path KR7 for feeding a game ball to the fourth rolling part 381e.

  The fourth rolling portion 381e is an inclined surface for dropping the game balls rolled on the third rolling portion 381d and the first rolling portion 381a to the front side, and the third rolling portion 381d and the third rolling portion 381d It is formed at a position lower in the direction of gravity than the first rolling part 381a and is inclined downward toward the front side. As a result, the game balls sent from the third rolling part 381d and the first rolling part 381a are smoothly rolled on the upper surface of the fourth rolling part 381e, and rolled to the front side of the fourth rolling part 381e. Can be moved. That is, the eighth rolling path KR8 is formed by the fourth rolling section 381e to allow the game balls sent from the first rolling section 381a and the third rolling section 381d to flow down to the front side of the main body section 380.

  The shaft support hole 381f is formed penetrating in the gravity direction at an intermediate position between the two second rolling portions 381c formed on both sides of the main body 380.

  The V winning member 382 is a ball receiving portion that sends a part of a game ball sent to the front side from the fourth rolling portion 381e of the upper surface base 381 to the inside of the V winning member 382, and is an upper surface disposed above. The base 381 is formed in a box-like body that is open. The V winning member 382 is mainly formed with a shaft portion 382c that protrudes downward in the direction of gravity and a curved portion 382b that protrudes in a semicircular shape around the shaft portion 382c.

  The shaft portion 382c is a shaft portion that is coupled to a part of the transmission means that transmits the driving force from the first drive motor M1, and extends downward from the bottom surface of the V winning member 382 formed in a substantially box shape in the gravity direction. Protrusively formed. Therefore, the V winning member 382 can be rotationally displaced about the shaft portion 382c as a driving force is applied from the first drive motor M1.

  The curved portion 382b is a protruding portion that suppresses the formation of a gap on the front side of the main body portion 380 when the V winning member 382 rotates around the shaft portion 382c, and both sides in the circumferential direction of the V winning member 382 And projecting in a circular shape around the axis of the shaft portion 382c.

  The first lower surface base 383 is provided on the lower surface of the upper surface base 381 and includes a concave portion 383a in which a part on the front side is recessed downward in the gravitational direction.

  The recess 383a is a recess that forms an opening for allowing the V winning member 382 to protrude from between the upper surface base 381 and the first lower surface base 383, and is larger than the height dimension of the V winning member 382 in the gravity direction. Set to depth. Thus, when the V winning member 382 is disposed between the upper surface base 381 and the first lower surface base 383, a part of the V winning member 382 can be protruded through the recess 383a.

  The first transmission means 384 is formed by a first gear 384a connected to the first drive motor M1 and a second gear 384b connected to the shaft support hole 381f of the V winning member 382. Further, the first transmission means 384 is covered and held by a cover plate 385 disposed to face the first lower surface base 383.

  The first gear 384a is formed in a circular shape, and gear teeth 384a1 are engraved on the outer peripheral surface. The second gear 384b is formed in a substantially fan shape when viewed from above. The second gear 384b is provided with gear teeth 384b1 meshed with the first gear 384a on the outer peripheral surface, and a through hole 384b2 penetrating in the gravity direction is formed on the shaft side of the gear teeth 384b1.

  The through hole 384b2 is a hole that is fitted around the shaft portion 382c of the V winning member 382, and is formed with an inner diameter that is substantially the same as or smaller than the diameter of the shaft portion 382c. Therefore, when the first drive motor M1 is rotated, the driving force is transmitted from the first gear 384a to the second gear 384b, and the shaft portion 382c that is externally fitted to the shaft portion 382c of the second gear 384b is rotated. The winning member 382 is rotated.

  The distribution portion 389 is mainly formed with a shaft portion 389a that can be inserted into the shaft support hole 381f of the upper surface base 381, and a path switching portion 390b that swells in a fan shape radially outward from the base portion of the shaft portion 389a. The In addition, the distributing unit 389 is disposed between the two second rolling units 381c.

  A part of the path switching unit 390b swelled in a fan shape with the displacement of the distribution unit 389 is positioned on the fifth pitching path KR5. Thereby, it is possible to cause a game ball that is sent along the fifth pitching route KR5 to be sent to the second rolling portion 381c. A detailed description of the distribution unit 389 will be described later.

  The tip of the shaft portion 389a is inserted into the shaft support hole 381f of the upper surface base 381, and is connected to a part of the second transmission means 387. Thereby, when a driving force is applied to the second drive motor M2, the shaft portion 389a is rotated via the transmission means 387.

  The second transmission means 387 is formed by a first gear 387a connected to the second drive motor M2 and a second gear 387b connected to the shaft portion 389a of the distributing portion 389. Further, the second transmission means 387 is covered and held by a second lower surface base 388 disposed to face the upper surface base 381.

  The first gear 387a is formed in a circular shape, and gear teeth are engraved on the outer peripheral surface. The second gear 387b is formed in a substantially fan shape when viewed from above. The second gear 387b has a gear tooth 387b1 that meshes with the first gear 387a on the outer peripheral surface, and a through hole 387b2 that penetrates in the direction of gravity.

  The through hole 387b2 is a hole that is fitted around the shaft portion 389a of the distributing portion 389, and has an inner diameter that is substantially the same as the diameter of the shaft portion 389a or an inner diameter that is smaller than the diameter of the shaft portion 389a. Therefore, when the second drive motor M2 is rotated, the driving force is transmitted from the first gear 387a to the second gear 387b, and the shaft portion 389a that is externally fitted to the shaft portion 389a of the second gear 387b is rotated to vibrate. The minute portion 389 is rotated.

  Next, the operation of the allocating unit 389 will be described with reference to FIGS. 59 to 61 are top views of the allocating unit 389. FIG. In FIGS. 59 to 61, the second transmission means 387 is indicated by a broken line. 59 shows the state in which the distribution unit 389 is rotated counterclockwise about the shaft 389a with FIG. 60 as the initial position, and FIG. 61 shows the state where the distribution unit 389 has the shaft 389a with FIG. 60 as the initial position. Each of the states rotated right about the axis is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 60, when the gear teeth 387b1 of the second gear 387b mesh with the gear teeth of the first gear 387a at a substantially central position, the path switching unit 389b of the distribution unit 389 is centered on the horizontal center line. Are in a state of being symmetrical.

  Next, when the rotational driving force is transmitted from the initial position to the second transmission means 387 and the distribution unit 389 is rotated counterclockwise about the shaft 389a as shown in FIG. The switching unit 389b is positioned on the right side when viewed from the front.

  In this case, the distance dimension from the left end of the path switching unit 389b to the left end of the fifth fifth pitching path KR5 is made smaller than the diameter of the sphere. Therefore, the game ball sent through the left fifth pitching route KR5 cannot pass through the fifth pitching route KR5 and is sent to the sixth pitching route KR6. On the other hand, the distance between the right end of the allocating portion 389 and the right end of the right fifth throwing path KR5 is made larger than the diameter of the sphere. Therefore, the game balls sent on the right fifth pitching route KR5 are sent to the fifth pitching route KR5 without being sent to the sixth pitching route KR6, and are sent to the eighth pitching route KR8.

  In the state of FIG. 61 (the state rotated in the direction opposite to that in FIG. 59), the path switching unit 389b is positioned on the left side as viewed from the front.

  In this case, the distance dimension from the right end of the route switching unit 389b to the right end of the right fifth pitching route KR5 is made smaller than the diameter of the game ball. Therefore, the game ball sent through the right fifth throwing path KR5 cannot be inserted through the fifth throwing path KR5, and is sent to the sixth throwing path KR6. On the other hand, the distance from the left end of the allocating portion 389 to the left end of the fifth fifth pitching path KR5 is made larger than the diameter of the sphere. Accordingly, the game balls sent on the left fifth throwing path KR5 are sent to the fifth throwing path KR5 without being sent to the sixth throwing path KR6, and are sent to the eighth throwing path KR8.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 62 to FIG. 64, a description will be given of a game ball that flows down the second fifth pitching path KR5 when the allocating unit 389 is rotated counterclockwise about the shaft 389a. .

  62 to 64 are top views of the variable unit 360. FIG. 62 to 64 show the transition state of the flowing game balls.

  As shown in FIGS. 62 to 64, in the state where the distributing unit 389 is rotated counterclockwise about the shaft portion 389a, when a game ball is sent to the second pitching route KR5, one fifth pitching route The game balls passing through the right fifth throwing path KR5 in FIGS. 62 to 64 are sent to the eighth throwing path KR8 without interfering with the path switching unit 389b.

  On the other hand, the game ball passing through the other fifth pitching path KR5 (the fifth pitching path KR5 on the left side in FIGS. 62 to 64) interferes with the path switching unit 389b and is sent to the sixth pitching path KR6. .

  That is, in this embodiment, by rotating and displacing the distribution unit 389, the path through which the ball flows down can be switched, and the player can be shown the flow down path of a plurality of game balls. It can be improved.

  Next, the driving of the V winning member 382 will be described with reference to FIG. 65 (a) to 65 (c) are top views of the variable unit 360. FIG. In FIGS. 65 (a) to 65 (c), the first transmission means 384 is indicated by a broken line. FIG. 65 (a) shows the state where the V winning member 382 is rotated clockwise around the shaft portion 382c with FIG. 65 (b) as the initial position, and FIG. 65 (c) shows the state shown in FIG. 65 (b). As the initial position, the state where the V winning member 382 is rotated counterclockwise about the shaft portion 382c is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 65 (a) to 65 (c), when the driving force of the first drive motor M1 is transmitted to the V winning member 382 by the first transmission means 384, the tip of the V winning member 382 moves the shaft portion 382c. It is rotated around the shaft and displaced left and right.

  Thereby, the position where the game ball falling from the eighth pitching path KR8 to the front side (the lower side in FIG. 65 (a) to FIG. 65 (c)) enters the inside of the V winning member 382 can be made irregular. Therefore, the player can have a sense of expectation whether or not to enter the inside of the V winning member 382 to the end, and the player's interest can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 66 and 67, the round transfer ball portion 370 of the variable unit 360 will be described. 66 is an exploded front perspective view of the round transfer ball portion 370 of the variable unit 360, and FIG. 67 is an exploded rear perspective view of the round transfer ball portion 370 of the variable unit 360.

  The transfer ball portion 370 is divided and arranged on both sides in the left-right direction of the main body portion 380, and a connecting rod 371 in a rod state for inserting the turn transfer ball portion 370 divided on both sides through the main body portion 380 and connecting it, A left-handed transfer ball portion 370L disposed on one end side in the axial direction of the connecting rod 371 (left side in the left-right direction with respect to the main body) and the other end side in the axial direction of the connecting rod 371 (right in the left-right direction with respect to the main body portion 380) And a right-handed transfer ball portion 370 </ b> R disposed in the main body.

  The right-handed transfer ball part 370R and the left-handed transfer ball part 370L are simply provided with a driving means and a transmission means for transmitting the drive to the right-handed transfer ball part 370R, and other shapes are straight lines in the direction of gravity. Since it is formed symmetrically about the axis, detailed description of the left-handed transfer ball portion 370L will be omitted. Further, in the configuration of the left-handed transfer ball unit 370L, the symbol of R given to the configuration of the right-handed transfer ball unit 370R is changed to L and illustrated.

  The right-handed transfer ball portion 370R is connected to the other axial end of the connecting rod 371 and is rotatable around the axis of the connecting rod 371, and a drive motor 376R of driving means for applying a driving force to the rotating body 372R. A transmission means 377R for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 376R to the rotating body, an inner cover 373R for attaching the drive motor 376R, and an inner cover 373R. The outer cover 374R that holds the 377R so as not to fall off is mainly provided.

  The rotator 372R is disposed inside the first rotator 372Ra disposed on the main body 380 side, the second rotator 372Rc connected to the first rotator 372Ra, and the second rotator 372Rc. And a magnet 372Rb having a magnetic force.

  The first rotator 372Ra is a columnar rotator that is connected to the connecting rod 371 and rotates, and includes a through hole 372Ra1 that opens to the shaft. The through hole 372Ra1 is an opening for fitting the other end of the connecting rod 371, and has an inner diameter that is substantially the same as or smaller than the outer shape of the connecting rod 371. Therefore, the first rotating body 372Ra is connected by fitting the connecting rod 371 externally.

  The second rotator 372Rc is formed in a cylindrical shape having substantially the same outer shape as the first rotator 372Ra, and is disposed on the same axis as the first rotator 372Ra and attached to the first rotator 372Ra. .

  The second rotating body 372Rc is a portion that attracts and sends a game ball to the outer peripheral surface, and has a concave portion 372Rc1 into which a magnet 372Rb described later is inserted, and a concave portion on the outer peripheral surface on the radially outer side of the concave portion 372Rc1. And a groove 372Rc2 provided.

  The recess 372Rc1 is recessed in a surface attached to the first rotator 372Ra of the second rotator 372Rc, and has an inner shape substantially the same as the outer shape of the magnet 372Rb. Therefore, the rotating body 372R has the magnet 372Rb disposed therein by attaching the second rotating body 372Rc to the first rotating body 372Ra after inserting the magnet 372Rb into the recess 372Rc1 of the second rotating body 372Rc. It is assembled in.

  The magnet 372Rb is formed in a disk shape, and is inserted into the recess 372Rc1 of the second rotating body 372Rc with the flat surface directed radially outward.

  The transmission means 377R is a gear train that transmits the driving force of the drive motor 376R to the rotating body 372R, and includes transmission gears 377Ra to 377Rc. The leading transmission gear 377Ra is coupled to the drive motor 376R, and the trailing transmission gear 377Rc is coupled to the second rotating body Rc2. Therefore, when the drive motor 376R is rotated, the driving force is transmitted from the transmission gear 377Ra to the transmission gear 377Rc, and the rotating body 372R is rotated.

  Here, as described above, since the rotating body 372R is connected to the connecting rod 371, the rotating body 372L of the leftward transfer ball portion 370L is similarly connected to one end of the connecting rod 371. Thereby, the rotating body 372R and the rotating body 372L can be rotated in synchronization.

  The inner cover 373R is a plate that has an opening for collecting the game ball rolling on the main body 380, and on which the transmission means 377R of the right-handed transfer ball portion 370R is disposed, and is collected through in the axial direction of the first rotating body 372Ra. The first opening 373Rc opened on the shaft of the hole 373Ra, the guide wall 373Rb protruding from the edge of the recovery hole 373Ra in the axial direction of the first rotating body 372Ra, and the second rotating body 372Rc and the transmission gear 377Rc And a second opening 373Rd opened on the axis of the drive motor 376R.

  The collection hole 373Ra is an opening through which a game ball passing through the fifth pitching path KR5 is inserted, and is formed on the end side of the fifth pitching path KR5 and has an inner shape larger than the diameter of the sphere.

  The guide wall 373Rb is a wall portion for allowing a game ball inserted through the inside of the recovery hole 373Ra to flow downward in the gravitational direction. The guide wall 373Rb protrudes from the edge of the recovery hole 373Ra and is open at the lower side in a side view. It is formed in a letter shape. Therefore, when the outer cover 374R is covered with the inner cover 373R from the outer side in the axial direction of the connecting rod 371, the sixth pitching path KR6, which is a path for pitching game balls, can be formed between the guide walls 373Rb.

  The first opening 373Rc is an opening that allows the second rotating body 372Rc and the transmission gear 377Rc to be connected, and is formed in a circular shape having an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the second rotating body 372Rc. Thereby, transmission gear 377Rc arrange | positioned on the outer side of inner side cover 373R and 2nd rotary body 372Rc can be connected.

  The second opening 373Rd is an opening that allows the drive motor 376R and the transmission gear 377Ra to be connected, and is formed in a circular shape having an outer shape larger than the rotation shaft of the drive motor 376R. As a result, the transmission gear 377Ra disposed outside the inner cover 373R and the drive motor 376R can be coupled.

  The outer cover 374R is a plate member disposed on the outer side in the left-right direction of the inner cover 373R, and has an outer shape substantially the same as the inner cover 373R in a side view. Further, by covering the outer cover 374 from the outside of the inner cover 373R, the above-described sixth ball feeding path KR6 is formed, and each transmission gear of the transmission means 377R is provided between the outer cover 374R and the inner cover 373R. 377Ra to 377Rc can be held rotatably.

  Next, the rotating body 372R will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 68 (a) is a side view of the rotator 372R, FIG. 68 (b) is a top view of the rotator 372R, and FIG. 68 (c) is taken along line LXVIIIc-LXVIIIc in FIG. 68 (b). FIG. 68D is a cross-sectional view of the rotator 372R, and FIG. 68D is a cross-sectional view of the rotator 372R along the line LXVIIId-LXVIIId in FIG. 68B. In FIGS. 68A and 68B, the outer shape of the magnet 372Rb is indicated by a broken line.

  As shown in FIG. 68, the groove 372Rc2 formed in the second rotating body 372Rc of the rotating body 372R is recessed in a substantially rectangular shape in the radial direction of the rotating body 372R, and the outer shape thereof is set larger than the outer shape of the magnet 372Rb. Is done. Further, the groove portion 372Rc2 has a flat surface located on the inner side in the radial direction of the rotating body 372R.

  Next, the rotation of the rotating body 372R will be described with reference to FIGS. FIGS. 69A to 69C are schematic cross-sectional views of the displacement unit 560 along the line LXIX-LXIX in FIG. FIGS. 70A to 70C are partial top views of the displacement unit 560. FIG.

  69A, the groove 372Rc2 of the second rotator 372Rc is adjacent to the sixth pitching path KR6. In FIG. 69B, the groove 372Rc2 of the second rotator 372Rc is located at the upper end. FIG. 69 (c) shows a state where the groove 372Rc2 of the second rotating body 372Rc is adjacent to the pitching path KR7. FIG. 70 (a) shows a corresponding state, FIG. 70 (b) shows a corresponding state in FIG. 69 (b), and FIG. 70 (c) shows a corresponding state in FIG. 69 (c).

  As shown in FIGS. 69 (a) and 70 (a), the second rolling portion 381c of the sixth pitching path KR6 is arranged above the rotational axis of the rotating body 372R in the gravity direction. Therefore, when the sixth pitching path KR6 and the groove 372Rc2 of the second rotator 372Rc are adjacent to each other, the radially inner flat surface of the groove 372Rc2 is inclined to the front side toward the upper side.

  When a driving force is applied from the driving motor 376R from the state shown in FIGS. 69A and 70A, the rotating body 372R is rotated to the left around the axis when viewed in the right direction (viewed in the direction of FIG. 69). . Therefore, the states shown in FIGS. 69 (c) and 70 (c) are formed through the states shown in FIGS. 69 (b) and 70 (b).

  As shown in FIGS. 69 (c) and 70 (c), the third rolling part 381d of the seventh throwing path KR6 and the rotating shaft of the rotating body 372R are arranged above the rotational axis of the rotary body 372R, and the second rolling part It is formed above the moving part 381c. Therefore, when the seventh pitch KR7 and the groove 372Rc2 of the second rotator 372Rc are adjacent to each other, the radially inner flat surface of the groove 372Rc2 is inclined upward toward the back side.

  Next, a state in which the variable unit 360 and the rear base 390 are combined will be described with reference to FIG. 71A is a front view of the variable unit 360 and the back base 390, and FIG. 71B is a top view of the variable unit 360 and the back base 390.

  As shown in FIGS. 71A and 71B, the variable unit 360 is disposed on one side of the lower surface base 390 in the direction of gravity. Further, the two annular members 394 of the back surface base 390 are disposed on the outer side in the left-right direction of the first rolling part 381a.

  In addition, the annular member 394 is disposed below the third pitching path KR3 described above. More specifically, the third pitching path KR3 is connected to the side surface on the second rolling portion 392c side of the annular member 394 formed in a substantially circular shape. Therefore, the game balls sent inside the third ball sending path KR3 are guided by the upper surface of the annular member 394 and can be sent to the second rolling portion 381c on the front side. As described above, the fourth pitching path KR4 is connected to the fifth pitching path formed by the first rolling part 382a. That is, the third pitching path KR3 is connected to the sixth pitching path KR6, and the fourth pitching path KR4 is linked to the fifth pitching path KR5.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 72 to 74, the game ball passing through the sixth pitching path will be described. 72 (a) to 72 (c) are top views of the variable unit 360 and the rear base 390, and FIGS. 73 (a) to 73 (c) are taken along line LXXIII-LXXIII in FIG. 72 (a). 74A and 74C are cross-sectional views of the variable unit 360 and the rear base 390, and FIGS. 74A to 74C are cross-sectional views of the variable unit 360 and the rear base 390 taken along line LXXVI-LXXVI in FIG. 71B. 72 (a) to 72 (c), 73 (a) to 73 (c), and 74 (a) to 74 (c), the transition state of the game ball is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 72 (a), 73 (a), and 74 (a), the game balls sent from the third pitching route KR3 are guided to the upper surface of the annular member 394 as described above. Then, it is guided to the upper part of the second rolling part 381c.

  As shown in FIGS. 72 (b), 73 (b), and 74 (b), the game ball rolled to the upper part of the second rolling part 392c is inclined downward (see FIG. 74). (See (b)), and is sent on the sixth pitching route KR6.

  As shown in FIG. 72 (c), FIG. 73 (c) and FIG. 74 (c), the game ball sent to the end of the sixth pitching path KR6 is sent to the collection hole 373Ra formed in the inner cover 373R, It collects by flowing down a passage formed between the inner cover 373R and the outer cover 374R. In other words, the recovery hole 373Ra of the inner cover 373R is opened at the end of the sixth pitching path KR6, and the lower end surface of the recovery hole 373Ra is formed at a position substantially the same as or slightly lower than the second rolling portion 381c. Is done. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly send the game balls sent through the sixth pitching route KR6 into the collection hole 373Ra.

  Further, since the second rolling part 381c is formed as an inclined surface that rolls the game ball in a direction substantially parallel to the direction of the rotation axis of the rotator 372R, the game ball rolling the second rolling part 381c. The direction of rolling and the direction in which the game ball is sent along with the rotation of the rotating body 372R can be made to be substantially orthogonal to each other. As a result, the movement of the game ball is changed, and the number of game balls visible at a time can be ensured to improve the interest of the player.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 75, the case where the stopper part 396 of the back surface base 390 is displaced is demonstrated. 75A is a cross-sectional view of the variable unit 360 and the rear base 390 in a state where the stopper portion 396 is not displaced, and FIG. 75B is a sectional view of the variable unit 360 and the rear surface in a state after the stopper portion 396 is displaced. It is sectional drawing of the base 390. FIG. 75 (a) and 75 (b) correspond to the cross section of FIG. 73 (a).

  As shown in FIG. 75A, in the state where the stopper portion 396 is not displaced, as described above, the end portion A2 is arranged on the upper side in the gravity direction of the shaft of the shaft hole 396c. Therefore, the sixth pitching path KR6 and the recovery hole 373Ra of the inner cover 373R are in communication with each other, and the game ball passing through the sixth pitching path KR6 can be recovered by passing through the inner side of the recovery hole 373Ra.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 75 (b), in the state in which the stopper portion 396 is displaced, as described above, the end portion A2 has substantially the same height as the shaft hole 396c in the gravity direction. The Therefore, the stopper 396 is interposed between the sixth ball feeding path KR6 and the collection hole 373Ra, and the sixth ball feeding path KR6 and the collection hole 373Ra are blocked. As a result, the game balls sent along the sixth pitching path KR6 are brought into contact with the stopper portion 396 and stopped.

  Accordingly, the stopper 396 that blocks the rolling of the game ball in the second rolling unit 381c is provided, and the magnet of the rotating body 372R is disposed at a position where the game ball whose rolling is blocked by the stopper 396 can be attracted. Therefore, the game ball rolling on the second rolling portion 381c is directly attracted to the rotating body 372R and the game ball rolling on the second rolling portion 381c is rotated after being blocked by the stopper portion 396. Form that is adsorbed to the body 372R (that is, the game ball that would have passed without adsorbing to the rotating body 372R unless blocked by the stopper part 396 can be adsorbed to the rotating body 372R by being blocked by the stopper part 396. Can be formed, and as a result, the interest of the player can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 76 to 79, a game ball sent by the rotating body 372R will be described. 76 to 78 are top views of the variable unit 360 and the rear base 390, and FIGS. 79A to 79C are cross-sectional views of the variable unit 360 and the rear base 390. FIG.

  79 (a) corresponds to the cross section of FIG. 69 (a), FIG. 79 (b) corresponds to the cross section of FIG. 69 (b), and FIG. 79 (c) corresponds to the cross section of FIG. 69 (c). . Further, in FIGS. 76 to 78 and FIGS. 79A to 79C, the transition state of the sphere is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 76 and FIG. 79 (a), when the groove 372Rc2 of the second rotating body 372Rc is adjacent to the sixth pitching path KR6, the game balls sent through the sixth pitching path KR6 are It is attracted to the magnet 372Rb disposed inside the rotating body 372Rc. That is, the game ball is attracted to the inner surface of the groove 372Rc2 of the second rotating body 372Rc.

  When the rotating body 372R is rotated from the state shown in FIGS. 76 and 79 (a), the rotating body 372R is rotated in a state in which the sphere is adsorbed to the magnet 372Rb of the second rotating body 372Rc.

  Here, a substantially columnar rotating member (rotating bodies 372R, 372L) formed so as to be rotatable in a posture in which the rotating shaft is directed in the horizontal direction, and a game ball is disposed on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member disposed on the rotating member. There is known a gaming machine that includes a magnet (372Rb) to be attracted and rotates the rotating member in a state in which the game ball is attracted to the outer peripheral surface, thereby sending the game ball in the rotation direction of the rotating member. Yes. When two game balls are rolled in a row toward the rotating member, the preceding game ball is adsorbed on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member, and the subsequent game ball is adsorbed on the preceding game ball. There is a case. In this case, when the rotating member is rotated, the weight of two balls acts, and there is a problem that the adsorption between the rotating member and the preceding game ball is released.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the second rolling part 381c is provided in parallel with the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 372R and the game ball rolls, and the second rolling part 381c is the rotating member. Since it is located above the rotation axis in the gravitational direction, for example, the two rolling balls 381c are rolled in a state where two gaming balls are linked to the rotating body 372R, and the preceding gaming ball is moved to the rotating body 372R. When a game ball that is attracted to the outer peripheral surface and is followed by the preceding game ball is attracted, the preceding game ball can be easily placed on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 372R. Therefore, it is difficult to release the adsorption between the rotating body 372R and the preceding game ball.

  Here, the game balls attracted and sent by the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 372R are arranged in parallel with the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 372R on the opposite side of the second rolling portion 381c with the rotating body 372R interposed therebetween. When it is received by the moving part 381d, the game ball easily jumps at the third rolling part 381d at this time, and it is difficult to smoothly send the game ball from the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 372R to the third rolling part 381d. There was a problem.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the 3rd rolling part 381d is located in the gravity direction upper direction rather than the rotating shaft of the rotary body 372R, it suppresses that a game ball jumps with the 3rd rolling part 381d, and rotates. A game ball can be smoothly fed from the outer peripheral surface of the body 372R to the third rolling portion 381d. That is, the third rolling unit 381d can receive the game ball before the displacement component downward in the gravitational direction increases with the rotation of the rotating body 372R (that is, at a stage where the horizontal component is relatively large). Since it can do, it can suppress that a game ball jumps in the 3rd rolling part 381d. Further, before the third rolling part 381d receives the game ball, it is possible to prevent the gaming ball from being released from the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 372R to the third rolling part 381d before the game ball is released. . Also from this point, it is possible to suppress the game ball from bouncing at the third rolling portion 381d.

  Further, since the third rolling portion 381d is formed to be inclined downward toward the direction away from the rotating body 372R, the third rolling section 381d is attracted to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 372R and is sent along with the rotation of the rotating body 372R. The direction in which the game ball is sent can be made closer to the direction of rolling of the game ball that is subsequently received by the third rolling unit 381d. As a result, the game ball can be smoothly sent from the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 372R to the third rolling unit 381d by suppressing the game ball from bouncing at the third rolling unit 381d.

  The rotating body 372R includes a groove 372Rc2 that is recessed in the outer peripheral surface thereof, and the magnet 372Rb is disposed at a position where the game ball is attracted to the inner surface of the groove 372Rc2, and therefore the inner surface (between the outer peripheral surface and the groove 372Rc2) It is possible to support the game ball with a step). As a result, for example, the second rolling portion 381c is rolled in a state where two game balls are linked to the rotating body 372R, and the preceding game ball is attracted to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 372R, and the When a game ball that follows the preceding game ball is adsorbed, the adsorption between the rotating body 372R and the preceding game ball can be hardly released.

  In addition, the recess depth of the groove 372Rc2 is set to a dimension that allows the game ball to come into contact with the bottom surface of the groove 372Rc2 in a state where the game ball is fitted in the groove 372Rc2, and the second rolling part 381c side. Since the third rolling portion 381d side is set to a smaller size than the rotating ball 372R, when the game ball sent along with the rotation of the rotating body 372R is staggered in the rotating direction of the rotating body 372R, the gaming ball is removed from the groove 372Rc2. It is easy to roll (drop off) toward the third rolling portion 381d. That is, it is possible to prevent the adsorption of the game ball from being released and returning to the second rolling portion 381c.

  Next, through the state shown in FIGS. 77 and 79 (b), the groove 372Rc2 of the second rotating body 372Rc shown in FIGS. 78 and 79 (c) is rotated to a position adjacent to the seventh pitching path KR7. Then, the game ball adsorbed on the inner surface of the groove portion 372Rc2 is caught by the third rolling portion 381d of the seventh throwing path KR7. Thereby, the ball is released from the adsorption of the second rotating body 372Rc with the magnet 372Rb, and is sent on the seventh pitching path KR7.

  Here, if the release of the adsorption of the rotating body 372R and the game ball is released below the axis of the rotating body in the direction of gravity, the gravity of the game ball easily acts around the axis of the rotating body 372R, and the rotation of the rotating body 372R There is a risk that speed will be increased.

  Therefore, there is a problem that when the adsorption of the rotating body 372R and the game ball is released, the kinetic energy of the rotating body 372R increases, and the rotating body 372 bounces when colliding with the third rolling part 381d. . Alternatively, if the rotating body 372 is rotated in the state where the rotating body 372 and the game ball are adsorbed and the ball is sent below the axis of the rotating body 372R in the gravitational direction, the game ball cannot be supported by the rotating body 372. In addition, the suction between the rotating body 372 and the game ball is released, and the game ball falls to the third rolling part 381d and bounces.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the base portion of the third rolling portion 381d is disposed above the axis of the rotator 372 in the gravitational direction, so that the release of the adsorption between the rotator 372 and the game ball is released. It can be above the axis of 372 in the direction of gravity. Thereby, when adsorption | suction with the rotary body 372 and a game ball is cancelled | released, it can suppress that a game ball bounces.

  Further, the third rolling part 381d is formed to be inclined downward in the direction from the second rolling part 381c to the third rolling part 381d, so that the game is attracted to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 372 and is sent. The ball sending direction and the rolling direction of the third rolling part 381d can be made substantially coincident. Therefore, since the game ball adsorbed on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 372 has kinetic energy in the rotating direction due to the rotational displacement of the rotating body 372, the adsorbing with the rotating body 372 is released by the third rolling portion 381d. In this case, it is easy to move in the direction in which kinetic energy acts. As described above, since the direction in which the game balls are attracted to the outer peripheral surface of the rotator 372 and the direction in which the third rolling portion 381d rolls substantially coincide with each other, the ball is sent to the third rolling portion 381d. This makes it easier to roll the game balls that are played. As a result, the game ball sent to the third rolling part 381d can be easily rolled.

  Note that the game ball sent on the seventh pitch route KR7 rolls to the front side due to the downward inclination of the third rolling portion 381d to the front side, and is sent to the eighth pitch route KR8.

  Therefore, the game balls sent through the sixth pitching route KR6 can be sent to the seventh pitching route KR7 by the rotation of the rotating body 372R. Therefore, since a plurality of ball sending paths can be formed, the interest of the player can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 80, the adsorption of the game ball to be adsorbed on the inner surface of the groove 372Rc2 of the second rotating body 372Rc will be described in detail. FIG. 80 is a cross-sectional view of the variable unit 360 and the rear base 390. 80 corresponds to the cross section of the variable unit 360 and the back base 390 of FIG. FIG. 80 shows a state in which the sphere is slightly rotated after being attracted to the inner surface of the groove 372Rc2. Further, in FIG. 80, the connecting portion between the groove 372Rc2 and the second rotator 372Rc opposite to the rotating direction of the rotator 372 is illustrated with the end A3.

  As shown in FIG. 80, in the role of attracting and sending a game ball on the outer peripheral surface of a rotating rotating body, the game is sent to the game ball adsorbed on the inner surface of the groove 372Rc2 later through the sixth throwing path KR6. Spheres can be adsorbed. When the following game ball is attracted to the preceding game ball, the gravity of the two game balls acts on the adsorption surface between the groove 372Rc2 and the preceding game ball. As a result, there is a problem in that the suction between the preceding game ball and the groove portion 372Rc2 is released when the subsequent game ball is attracted to the preceding game ball.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 80, the game ball attracted to the inner periphery of the groove portion 372Rc2 is sent while being in contact with the end portion A3. Thereby, even if force in the direction of gravity acts on the ball, the end A3 supports the game ball, so that it is difficult to displace the ball in the direction of gravity, and the game ball can be prevented from falling from the groove 372Rc2. Therefore, even when a subsequent game ball is attracted to the preceding game ball, it is possible to suppress the adsorption of the preceding game ball and the groove portion 372Rc2.

  Further, as described above, the sixth ball feeding path KR6 is formed above the rotation axis of the rotating body 372R in the gravitational direction, so that the game ball attracted to the inner surface of the groove 372Rc2 can easily come into contact with the end A3. it can. As a result, it is possible to effectively suppress the adsorption of the groove 372Rc2 and the game ball from being released.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 81 to 90, the winning a prize opening unit 600 will be described. First, the overall configuration of the winning opening unit 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 81 to 83. FIG. 81 (a) is a front view of the winning opening unit 600, and FIG. 81 (b) is a rear view of the winning opening unit 600. FIG. 82 is an exploded front perspective view of the winning opening unit 600, and FIG. 83 is an exploded rear perspective view of the winning opening unit 600.

  As shown in FIGS. 81 to 83, the winning opening unit 600 includes a decorative board 610 having a plurality of winning openings 26, 27, and 28, a face facing the decorative board 610, and a game ball flowing between them. A base plate 630 that forms a path, a path member 640 that forms a pitching path for game balls between the base plate 630, and the base plate 630 are disposed between the facing plate 610 and the base plate 630. A variable winning device 650 for guiding a flowing game ball to any of the winning openings 26, 27, 28 is mainly provided.

  The decorative plate 610 is formed of a left cover member 611 having a left start winning port 26, a right cover member 612 having a right start winning port 27, and a central cover member 613 having a middle start winning port 28.

  Note that the left cover member 611 and the right cover member 612 are formed symmetrically with the central cover member 613 interposed therebetween, and the detailed description thereof is only the right cover member 612. In this case, the left start winning opening 26 corresponds to the right start winning opening 27.

  The right cover member 612 is formed of a plate-like body that is curved in a semicircular shape on the lower side in the gravity direction when viewed from the front, and a right start winning opening 27 is formed in the vicinity of the curved axis.

  The center cover member 613 is formed in a semicircular shape whose upper side is curved when viewed from the front, and is disposed at the center of the left cover member 611 and the right cover member 612. The center cover member 613 is formed between the guide plate 613a that protrudes from the vicinity of the curved axis, the standing walls 613b and 613c that project in an arc shape around the curved axis, and the standing walls 613b and 613c facing each other. The main start winning opening 28 and the cover-side protrusion 613d protruding from both sides of the guide plate 613a are mainly provided.

  The guide plate 613a is a projection for guiding a game ball inserted through the inside of the middle start winning opening 28 to a through hole 632a of the base plate 630, which will be described later, and is disposed above the through hole 632a in the gravity direction. Further, the upper surface of the guide plate 613a is inclined downward toward the projecting tip. Thereby, the game ball that passes through the inside of the middle start winning opening 28 and is sent to the upper surface of the guide plate 613a rolls to the back side of the base plate 630 and is sent to the through hole 632a of the base plate 630. it can.

  Further, the guide plate 613a is formed with a contact surface 613a1 having a large inclination angle on the upper surface on the base side, and a rolling surface 613a2 having a smaller inclination angle than the contact surface 613a1 on the upper surface on the distal end side.

  The abutment surface 613a1 is a surface that is brought into contact with the game ball that is won in the middle start winning opening 28 and stabilizes the game ball sent to the through hole 632a. The game ball is brought into contact with the outer surface on the front side of the lower end in the direction of gravity. That is, the contact surface 613a1 is set such that the distance from the connecting portion to the base of the rolling surface 613a2 is larger than the radius of the game ball, and the upper dimension in the gravity direction is set larger than the radius of the game ball. Is done. Therefore, the game ball inserted through the inside start winning opening 28 can be brought into contact with the rolling surface 613a2. Thereby, the component of the force in the direction of gravity of the game ball sent to the middle start winning opening 28 can be applied to the through hole 632a side by the reaction caused by the collision with the contact surface 613a1. As a result, it is possible to smoothly guide the game ball sent into the inside start winning opening 28 to the through hole 632a of the base plate 630.

  The standing walls 613b and 613c are wall portions that form the middle start winning port 28, and are formed on the target with the middle start winning port 28 interposed therebetween. The standing walls 613b and 613c are formed from one side formed to be curved and the other side formed to hang from the center. The middle start winning opening 28 is formed between the opposite sides of the standing walls 613b and 613c.

  One side of the standing walls 613b and 613c is a rolling surface of the game ball for passing the game ball flowing down the game board 13 to the out port 71 without being inserted into the middle start winning port 28. Since the game ball sent to the upper surface on one side of the standing walls 613b and 613c can flow down outward in the left-right direction, a space can be formed below the standing walls 613b and 613c.

  The cover-side protrusion 613d is a protrusion for slowing down the speed of the game ball that rolls on the upper part of the variable plate 652 of the variable winning device 650, which will be described later, and will be described in detail later.

  The base plate 630 is formed in a plate shape that is horizontally long when viewed from the front, and a left recessed portion 631 in which portions where the cover members 611, 612, and 613 of the decorative plate 610 are disposed are recessed toward the back side, A central recess 632 and a right recess 633 are provided.

  The left recessed portion 631 is located at the lower side of the left through hole 631a formed in the left cover member 611 at a position facing the left starting winning opening 26, and below the left through hole 631a. And a second through hole 631b that is formed through the portion.

  The left through-hole 631a is a path of a game ball in which a game ball sent into the left start winning opening 26 flows down, and is formed to penetrate from the front side to the back side, and the inner shape is the outer shape of the game ball Is formed larger. Thereby, the game ball sent to the left start winning opening 26 can be collected through the left through hole 631a.

  The second through-hole 631b is an opening through which a game ball flowing through the vicinity of the left start winning opening 26 is inserted, is formed at the lower end of the left recess 631, and is located on the left side of the path member 640, which will be described later, in the front view. It is formed at a position facing one end. As a result, a game ball that does not flow to the left start winning opening 26 but flows down between the left recess 631 and the left cover member 611 can be sent to the path member 640 through the second through hole 631b.

  The right recessed portion 633 is located on the lower side in the gravitational direction than the right through hole 633a formed at a position facing the right start winning port 27 of the right cover member 612, and is located at the end of the left recessed portion 631. And a second through hole 633b that is formed to penetrate the portion.

  The right through-hole 633a is a path of the game ball that the game ball sent into the right start winning opening 27 flows down, and is formed to penetrate from the front side to the back side, and the inner shape is the outer shape of the ball Is formed larger. Thereby, the game ball sent to the right start winning opening 27 can be collected through the right through hole 633a.

  The second through-hole 633b is an opening through which a game ball flowing through the vicinity of the right start winning opening 27 is inserted, and is formed at the lower end of the right recessed portion 633 and on the right side of the path member 640 to be described later in the front view. It is formed at a position facing the other end. As a result, a game ball that is not sent to the right start winning opening 27 but flows down between the right recess 633 and the right cover member 612 can be sent to the path member 640 through the second through hole 633b.

  Therefore, the opening of the flow path of the game ball formed between the left and right recesses 631, 633 and the decorative plate 610 is positioned above the left start winning opening 26 and the right starting winning opening 27 in the gravity direction, Since the left start winning port 26 and the right start winning port 27 are disposed in the flow path of the game ball formed between the concave portions 631, 633 of the game board and the decorative plate 610, the second through holes 631b, 633b are provided. A part of the game balls that have flowed into can be entered into the left start winning opening 26 and the right starting winning opening 27. That is, the game balls that flow down without entering the left start winning opening 26 and the right start winning opening 27 can be surely flowed into the path member 640. As a result, it is possible to increase the expectation of the player entering the second entrance and improve the interest of the game.

  The central recess 632 has a through-hole 632a formed through substantially the center in the left-right direction of the base plate 630, two insertion holes 632c formed through both sides of the through-hole 632a, and an opening above the insertion hole 632c. And a base-side protrusion 632d that is located on both sides of the through-hole 632a and protrudes toward the center cover member 613.

  The through hole 632a is an opening through which a game ball that rolls on the upper portion of the guide plate 613a is inserted, and is formed in an opening larger than the outer shape of the ball. It is formed below the guide plate 613a in the direction of gravity.

  As described above, the insertion hole 632c is formed through both sides of the through hole 632a in the left-right direction. Further, the insertion hole 632c is formed in a horizontally long rectangle when viewed from the front, and is formed so as to be inclined downward toward the through hole 632a.

  The connection hole 632b is an opening through which a game ball sent through the path member 640, which will be described later, is discharged to the front side of the base plate 630, and penetrates above the outside of the insertion hole 632c (side away from the through hole 632a). It is formed.

  The base-side protrusion 632d is a protrusion that slows down the speed of the game ball that rolls on the upper portion of the variable plate 652 of the variable prize winning device 650 that passes through the inside of the insertion hole 632c and protrudes toward the center cover member 613. It protrudes and is formed above the through hole 632a side of 632c.

  The path member 640 is formed in a rectangular shape in front view, and is formed in a substantially box shape with the base plate 630 side opened. The path member 640 is a member for forming a path connecting the second through-holes 631b and 633b and the connection hole 632b, and is formed on the left side when viewed from the front, and the left side when viewed from the front of the second through-hole 631b and the base plate 630. The first passage 641 is connected to the connection hole 632b, and the second passage 642 is formed on the right side when viewed from the front, and connects the second through hole 633b and the connection hole 632b on the right side when viewed from the front of the base plate 630. The

  The first path 641 and the second path 642 of the path member 640 are formed so as to be inclined downward toward each other. Thereby, the game ball sent from the second through-hole 631b can roll on the first path 641 and be sent to the connection hole 632b. In addition, a game ball sent from the second through hole 633b can be sent to the connection hole 632b by rolling the second path 642.

  The variable winning device 650 is a device that includes a variable plate 652 that is slidable and is attached from the back side of the base plate 630, and is disposed in a state where the variable plate 652 is inserted through the insertion hole 632c.

  Next, the variable winning device 650 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 84A is a front view of the variable winning device 650, and FIG. 84B is a top view of the variable winning device 650. FIG. 85A is an exploded front perspective view of the variable winning device 650, and FIG. 85B is an exploded rear perspective view of the variable winning device 650.

  As shown in FIGS. 84 and 85, the variable prize winning device 650 includes a front base 651 connected to the base plate 630, and a variable plate 652 that is inserted in the front base 651 so as to be slidable. The transmission member 653 is connected to the base end of the variable plate 652 and can be rotationally displaced by the driving force of the driving means, the cover member 654 disposed around the transmission member 653, and the solenoid 655 of the driving means. Formed in preparation.

  The front base 651 is formed in a substantially horizontally long rectangle when viewed from the front, and mainly includes an opening 651b into which a distal end side of a variable plate 652 described later is inserted, and a recovery hole 651a connected to the through hole 632a of the base plate 630. Formed.

  The recovery hole 651a is a hole for recovering the game ball inserted through the through hole 632a of the base plate 630, and is connected to the back side of the through hole 632a.

  The opening 651b is an opening for stabilizing the slide when a later-described variable plate 652 slides and is formed to be slightly larger than the outer shape of the variable plate 652 in front view.

  The two variable plates 652 are plate members that roll the game ball on the upper surface as described above, and the distal ends thereof are inserted into the insertion holes 632c of the base plate 630 through the openings 651b. That is, the variable plate 652 is formed to be inclined in the direction in which the variable plates 65 approach each other. Thereby, when a game ball gets on the upper surface of the variable plate 652, the ball can be rolled and dropped onto the guide plate 613a.

  The variable plate 652 includes a recess 652a that is recessed in the direction of gravity. A rotation shaft 653a of a transmission member 653, which will be described later, is inserted into the recess 652a, and the displacement of the transmission member 653 is transmitted. As a result, the driving force is transmitted to the variable plate 652, and the variable plate 652 is slid.

  The transmission member 653 is formed in a plate-like body, and a rotation shaft 653c formed at one end is connected to a shaft hole 654a formed in the cover member 654. Further, the transmission member 653 includes an engaging portion 653b that is formed to protrude from the central portion of the rotating shaft 653a, and the engaging portion 653b is engaged with the protrusion 655a of the solenoid 655. Therefore, when the solenoid 655 is driven, the engaging portion 653b is pushed out, and the transmission member 653 is rotationally displaced about the rotation shaft 653c. Thereby, the variable plate 652 can be slid and displaced.

  Therefore, the through hole 632a on the flow path of the middle start winning opening 28 is provided with a variable plate 652 that makes it easy to win the game ball flowing down the upstream of the through hole 632a by the displacement operation into the through hole 632a. A game ball that does not win the left start winning opening 26 and the right start winning opening 27 but flows down in the vicinity of the left start winning opening 26 and the right start winning opening 27 and is sent to the inside of the path member 640 passes through the through hole 632a. The probability of winning a prize can be improved.

  In addition, since the pair of variable plates 652 are arranged on both sides of the through hole 632a so as to be inclined downward toward the through hole 632a, when the state in which the variable plate 652 protrudes is formed. Also, it is possible to make it easier to enter the through hole 632a with respect to the game ball flowing down from either the left or right side of the through hole 632a. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a stronger expectation for entering the through hole 632a. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Here, as a configuration that makes it easy for a game ball to enter the through-hole 632a, a pair of wing members are provided in the through-hole 632a so that the base end side is pivotally supported by a rotation shaft protruding from the game board 13. Such a so-called tulip that the game ball is guided to the through hole 632a by opening the wing member is conceivable. However, in such a configuration, a space for rotating (opening and closing) the wing member is required in the game area. In particular, in order to form a closed posture of the wing member, a space is required above the through hole 632a. Therefore, it enlarges in the up-and-down direction, and the arrangement space of other members (for example, the 1st entrance and a liquid crystal display device) decreases.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, a pair of plate-like variable plates 652 formed so as to be able to protrude to the front side of the game board 13 and to be immersible to the back side are provided with through holes on both sides of the through hole 632a. Since it is arranged in a posture of inclining downward toward 632a, it is possible to reduce the size in the vertical direction. As a result, an arrangement space for other members (for example, the first entrance and the liquid crystal display device) can be secured.

  Furthermore, since the connecting hole 632b of the path member 640 is disposed above the variable plate 652 in the direction of gravity, the game ball can easily enter the through hole 632a using the protruding variable plate 652. it can. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a stronger expectation for entering the through hole 632a. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  The second through-hole 631b and the path member 640, and the second through-hole 633b and the path member 640 are each formed as a pair, and one pair of the connection holes 632b of the pair of the path members 640 is a pair. The variable plate 652 is disposed above the one variable plate 652 in the gravity direction, and the connection hole 632b of the other path member 640 is disposed above the other variable plate 652 in the gravity direction. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier to enter the game ball into the through hole 632a by using the pair of variable plates 652 respectively. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a stronger expectation for entering the through hole 632a. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  The second through-hole 631b and the path member 640, and the second through-hole 633b and the path member 640 are spaced apart from each other on the left and right sides of the through-hole 632a (for example, the through-hole 632a is in the game area). It is preferable that two sets are disposed symmetrically in the width direction with the through-hole 632a interposed therebetween). With respect to the left start winning opening 26 and the right start winning opening 27, a game ball flowing down on one side in the width direction of the game area or the other side can be easily made to enter the through hole 632a and enter the through hole 632a. This is because the player can have a stronger expectation to play a ball.

  In addition, the edge of the variable plate 652 on the through hole 632a side is located between the lower edge of the through hole 632a in the gravity direction and the upper edge of the gravity direction, so that the game ball is sent in the width direction of the game area. In the case of (displacement), such a game ball can be easily brought into the through hole 632a by contacting the edge of the variable plate 652 in the protruded state on the through hole 632a side. That is, a game ball sent (displaced) from one side in the width direction of the game area passes through the front of the through hole 632a and is sent (displaced) to the other side in the width direction (the game ball enters the through hole 632a). (Escape in the width direction of the game area without ball) can be suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 86 and FIG. 87, the pitching path of the game balls of the winning opening unit 600 will be described. FIG. 86A is a front view of the winning opening unit 600, and FIG. 86B is a top view of the winning opening unit 600. 87 (a) and 87 (b) are partial front views of the winning opening unit 600 in the range LXXXVII in FIG.

  87A shows a state before displacement of the variable winning device 650, and FIG. 87B shows a state after displacement of the variable winning device 650. 86 and 87, the decorative plate 610 is shown in a transparent state. In FIG. 86 (a), the path member 640 is illustrated by a broken line.

  86A and 86B, the second through hole 631b and the connection hole 632b are connected by the first path 641 of the path member 640 that is disposed on the back side of the base plate 630. . On the other hand, the second through hole 633b and the connection hole 632b are connected by the second path 642 of the path member 640. Therefore, the game balls that are not sent to the left start winning opening 26 and the right start winning opening 27 but are sent to the second through holes 631b and 633b are sent inside the path member 640 and discharged from the connection hole 632b. .

  In this case, as shown in FIG. 87 (a), in a state before the variable winning device 650 is driven, the variable plate 652 of the variable winning device 650 is retracted to the back side from the central recess 632 of the base plate 630. Become. Therefore, the game ball discharged from the connection hole 632b is flowed downward and collected by the out port 71 formed in the game board 13.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 87 (b), when the variable winning device 650 is driven (the variable plate is slid and displaced), the variable plate 652 of the variable winning device 650 is in front of the central recess 632 of the base plate 630. Projected sideways. Therefore, the game ball discharged from the opening 651b is sent to the upper surface of the variable plate 652.

  Here, a gaming machine provided with a first entrance and a second entrance is known. In this case, the game balls that have not entered the first entrance are not entered into the second entrance, but only collected from the out entrance. Therefore, if a game ball launched at the first entrance does not enter the first entrance, the player expects the subsequent whereabouts of the game ball (the game ball flowing down). Can't have. For this reason, there has been a problem that it is not possible to give the player enough interest.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, a path member 640 that forms a path for a game ball that flows down without entering the left start winning opening 26 and the right start winning opening 27, and a game area are formed on the front side. The game board 13 and a plate-shaped variable plate 652 formed so as to be able to protrude to the front side of the game board 13 and to be immersed in the back side, and the game ball that has passed through the path member 640 is the front of the game board 13. The variable plate 652 projecting to the side can be guided to the through hole 632a, so that even if the game ball does not enter the left start winning port 26 and the right start winning port 27, the game ball flows down. It is possible to keep the player interested in paying attention and entering the through hole 632a. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Further, since the variable plate 652 is formed so as to be able to protrude to the front side of the game board 13 and to be immersible to the back side, in a state where the variable plate 652 is not functioned, by immersing it on the back side of the game board 13, Accordingly, a space can be secured on the front side of the game board 13 (the game area can be expanded). That is, the area where the game ball can move in the game area can be expanded.

  In addition, as the path member 640, for example, a path formed as a closed passage through which a game ball can pass, a path formed by one or a plurality of nails that define the flow-down direction of the game ball, and the game ball can roll What is formed as an inclined surface (open passage) is exemplified.

  Further, even when the variable plate 652 is immersed in the back side of the game board 13, it is naturally possible that the game ball that has passed through the path member 640 can enter the through hole 632a. In this case, it is preferable that the state in which the variable plate 652 is protruded is easier to enter the through hole 632a than the state in which the variable plate 652 is immersed. This is because attention can be paid to the state of the variable plate 652, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In addition, as described above, when a game ball wins the left start winning opening 26 and the right start winning opening 27, the probability that the game ball flows into the movable ball winning accessory 300 by opening and closing the wing 312. However, when the game ball wins the middle start winning opening 28, the probability that the game ball will flow into the movable ball accessory device 300 by opening and closing the wing 312 is set higher. The game balls that do not win the left start winning opening 26 and the right start winning opening 27 can have further expectation to win the middle start winning opening 28. As a result, it can suppress impairing the player's interest.

  That is, the profit given to the player by entering the through hole 632a is higher than the profit given to the player by entering the left start winning opening 26 and the right start winning opening 27. Therefore, even when a game ball does not enter the left start winning opening 26 and the right start winning opening 27, it is possible to give the player a stronger expectation that such a game ball will enter the through hole 632a. . As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, as a form with a high profit given to the player, a form in which a lot of prize balls are paid out upon entering the ball, or a ball entering the third ball entrance (between the facing of the recess 311a and the upper front cover 313) Examples are a mode in which the opening time of the wing part 312 that allows and regulates the length, a mode in which the number of times of opening the wing part 312 is increased, a mode in which the opening range of the wing part 312 is increased, and the like.

  In addition, since the base plate 60 is formed of a transparent flexible material, a game in which two paths, a path flowing down the back side of the base plate 60 and a path flowing down the front side of the base plate 60 intersect, is a game. Can be visually recognized. Therefore, it can suppress that a player's interest is impaired.

  That is, the path member 640 includes a second through hole 631b and a second through hole 633b that receive a game ball that flows down without entering the left start winning opening 26 and the right start winning opening 27, and the second through hole 631b and the second through hole 631b. And a connection hole 632b for allowing the game ball flowing in from the second through hole 633b to flow out to the game area, and is formed of a transparent flexible material, so that it flows from the second through hole 631b and the second through hole 633b. The player can visually recognize the manner in which the game ball flows down (passes) toward the connection hole 632b (second entrance). As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Next, a configuration around the through hole 632a will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 88 (a) is a top view of the winning opening unit 600, and FIG. 88 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 600 along the line LXXXVIIIb-LXXXVIIIb of FIG. 88 (a), and FIG. 88 (c). FIG. 81 is a cross-sectional view of the winning prize opening unit 600 taken along line LXXXVIIIc-LXXXVIIIc in FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 88 (a) to 88 (c), insertion holes 632c are opened at both ends of the through-hole 632a in the left-right direction, and the variable plate 652 of the variable winning device 650 is inserted therein. In this case, the height of the end portion of the variable plate 652 on the side of the through hole 632a is set to be approximately the same as the intermediate position of the height of the through hole 632a in the gravity direction. Thereby, the height distance of the edge part by the side of the through-hole 632a of the variable board 652 and the guide plate 613a is securable. As a result, when the game ball rolling on the upper portion of the variable plate 652 is sent to the through hole 632a, it is possible to secure a fall distance to the guide plate 613a, so that the ball is brought into contact with the contact surface 613a1. The impact force at the time of hitting can be secured, and the ball can be smoothly fed to the through hole 632a.

  A base-side protrusion 632d of 632a that protrudes from the central recess 632 of the base plate 630 is formed in a substantially triangular cross-section with a protruding distance that decreases outwardly from the through-hole 632a. Similarly, the cover-side protrusion 613d protruding from the center cover member 613 is also formed in a cross-sectional triangle in which the protruding distance is reduced outward from the through hole 632a. The base-side protrusion 632d and the cover-side protrusion 613d are formed at different positions in the front-rear direction, and the base-side protrusion 632d is formed closer to the through hole 632a than the cover-side protrusion 613d.

  In addition, a guide plate 613a that protrudes from the lower edge of the through hole 632a in the direction of gravity to the front side of the game board is provided, and the guide plate 613a is formed to be inclined downward toward the through hole 632a. Not only in the state where 652 is protruded but also in the state where the variable plate 652 is immersed, it flows down without entering the left start winning port 26 and the right start winning port 27 (passed through the path member 640). ) It is possible to easily enter the game ball into the through hole 632a. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a stronger expectation for entering the through hole 632a. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 89, a game ball inserted through the middle start winning opening 28 will be described. 89 (a) to 89 (c) are cross-sectional views of the winning prize opening unit 600. FIG. 89A to 89C correspond to FIG. 88B. Also, FIGS. 89 (a) to 89 (c) illustrate the respective transition states.

  As shown in FIGS. 89 (a) to 89 (c), when the game ball inserted through the middle start winning opening 28 flows down to the upper surface of the guide plate 613a, the variable plate 652 of the variable winning device 650 The ball can be stably fed to the through hole 632a by abutting against the end portion on the through hole 7632a side.

  Here, if the game ball that flows down is received by the guide plate 613a, the ball may sway in the left-right direction and not enter the through-hole 632a due to an impact at the time of collision.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the height position of the end portion on the through hole 632a side of the variable plate of the variable winning device 650 is set to be substantially the same as the intermediate position of the through hole 632a in the gravity direction, so the guide plate 613a When the ball is swayed in the left-right direction due to the impact of the collision, the ball can be brought into contact with the side surface of the variable plate and smoothly sent to the through hole 632a.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 90 (a) to FIG. 90 (c), a game ball sent on the upper part of the variable plate 652 of the variable winning device 650 will be described. 90 (a) to 90 (c) are cross-sectional views of the winning prize opening unit 600. FIG. 90A to 90C correspond to FIG. 88C.

  As shown in FIGS. 90 (a) to 90 (c), a game ball sent to the path member 640 and sent to the upper part of the variable plate 652 of the variable winning device 650 is received from the connection hole 632b of the base plate 630. While being rolled forward with the force of being discharged, the variable plate 652 is rolled toward the through hole 632a due to the inclination of the variable plate 652, thereby coming into contact with the cover-side protrusion 613d of the central cover member 613. Thereby, the ball is rolled to the through hole 632a side on the upper portion of the variable plate 652 while being guided to the back side by the projection shape of the cover side projection 613d.

  Next, the game ball that rolls toward the through hole 632a while being sent to the back side by the cover-side protrusion 613d comes into contact with the base-side protrusion 632d. As a result, the ball is rolled to the through hole 632a side while being guided to the front side by the protrusion shape of the base side protrusion 632d, and flows down to the upper portion of the guide plate 613a.

  Here, if the game ball rolling on the upper part of the variable plate 652 of the variable winning device 650 is not in contact with the cover-side protrusion 613d and the base-side protrusion 632d, the rolling speed of the ball is increased, and the guide plate There is a possibility that the game ball will be unstablely sent to the upper part of 613a, and that the game ball will be unstablely delivered to the through hole 632a.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a game ball that rolls on the upper part of the variable plate 652 of the variable winning device 650 is brought into contact with the cover-side protrusion 613d and the base-side protrusion 632d, thereby slowing the rolling speed of the ball. It is possible to stabilize the pitching of game balls to the through holes 632a.

  In this embodiment, the base-side protrusion 632d is formed closer to the through-hole 632a than the cover-side protrusion 613d, so that the game ball falling onto the guide plate 613a can be reliably applied to the contact surface 613a1 of the guide plate 613a. Can be touched. As a result, the game ball can be sent to the through hole 632a stably.

  Further, on the upper surface of the guide plate 613a, a feeding surface located on the side closer to the through hole 632a and a contact surface that is connected to the feeding surface and located on the side farther from the through hole 632a than the rolling surface 613a2. 613a1 is formed, and the angle of downward inclination of the contact surface 613a1 toward the through hole 632a is made larger than the angle of downward inclination of the feeding surface toward the through hole 632a. A game ball can smoothly enter the through hole 632a by using the downward inclination of the surface 613a1. In particular, even when the slide member is immersed, it uses the inclination of the contact surface 613a1 that has a large downward inclination to flow down without entering the first entrance (passing the passage member). It is possible to easily enter the game ball into the through hole 632a.

  Next, the variable unit 2360 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 to 96. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as 1st Embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the magnet 372Rb disposed on the rotating body 372R is formed to be smaller than the recess 372Rc1 has been described, but is larger than the magnet 2372Rb disposed on the rotating body 2372R in the second embodiment. It is formed. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as the said 1st Embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  91 (a) is a front view of the variable unit 2360 in the second embodiment, FIG. 91 (b) is a top view of the variable unit 2360, and FIG. 91 (c) is a diagram of FIG. 91 (b). It is sectional drawing of the variable unit 2360 in a XCIc-XCIc line. FIG. 92 is an exploded front perspective view of the variable unit 2360. FIG. 93 is an exploded rear perspective view of the variable unit 2360. 91 (a) and 91 (b), the outer shape of the magnet 2372Rb is illustrated by a broken line.

  As shown in FIGS. 91 to 93, the rotating body 2372R in the second embodiment includes a first rotating body 2372Ra disposed on the main body 380 side and a second rotating body connected to the first rotating body 2372Ra. 2372Rc and a magnet 2372Rb disposed inside the second rotating body 2372Rc and the first rotating body 2372Ra.

  The first rotating body 2372Ra is a columnar rotating body that is connected to the connecting rod 371 and rotates. The first rotating body 2372Ra mainly includes a through hole 372Ra1 that opens to the shaft and a recess 2372Ra2 that is recessed toward the main body. It is formed.

  The recess 2372Ra2 is a recess that accommodates a main body 380 side of a magnet 2372Rb, which will be described later, and is provided in a shape corresponding to the curved shape of the magnet 2372Rb. Thereby, the magnet 2372Rb can be accommodated inside the first rotating body 2372.

  Here, by the magnet 2372Rb disposed inside the rotating body 2372R, the game ball rolling the second rolling portion 381c is not attracted to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 2372R, and the rotating body 2372R and the game ball are attracted. In order to attract the game ball to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 2372R at the position, it is necessary to change the magnetic force of the magnet 2372Rb acting on the radially outer side of the rotating body 2372R. That is, in the part where the rolling speed of the game ball is slowed down, the magnetic force acting on the outer side in the radial direction of the rotating body 2372R is made relatively small, and in the part where the game ball is attracted to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 2372R, the rotating body 2372R. It is necessary to make the magnetic force acting on the outside in the radial direction relatively large.

  For this reason, the magnet 2372Rb disposed inside the rotating body 2372R is arranged with two magnets 2372Rb having different magnetic forces in the part that slows down the rolling speed of the game ball and the part that attracts the game ball to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 2372R. It is necessary to provide a magnet 2372Rb that is provided or only the attracting portion protrudes radially outward. Therefore, there has been a problem that the cost for manufacturing the magnet 2372Rb increases.

  On the other hand, according to the second embodiment, the magnet 2372Rb is disposed at a position that is separated from the axis of the rotating body 2372R by the same distance on the outer side in the radial direction, and is located at the attracting position between the rotating body 2372R and the game ball. Since the groove portion 2372Rc2 that is recessed in the radial direction is formed, the magnetic force acting on the outside of the suction position can be made relatively strong because the groove portion 2372Rc2 is formed to be recessed in the radial direction. Thereby, without complicating the shape of the magnet 2372Rb, it is possible to form a portion that slows down the rolling speed of the game ball and a portion that attracts the game ball to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 2372R. The increase can be suppressed.

  The second rotator 2372Rc is formed in a cylindrical shape having substantially the same outer diameter as the first rotator 2372, and is disposed coaxially with the first rotator 2372Ra and attached to the first rotator 372Ra. .

  The second rotating body 372Rc includes a recess 372Rc1 that is recessed outward from the main body 380 side, and a groove 2372Rc2 that is recessed on the outer circumferential surface on the radially outer side of the recess 372Rc1. The

  The groove portion 2372Rc2 is formed so that a radial recess distance is reduced toward the first rotating body 372Ra (see FIG. 91C). Thereby, the game ball adsorbed on the outer circumferential surface of the first rotating body 2372Ra rolls on the outer circumferential surface of the rotating body 2372R and falls into the groove portion 2372Rc2 from the rotating body 2372R when received in the groove portion 2372Rc2. Can be suppressed. As a result, the game ball can be stably sent to the groove 2372Rc2. The sending of the game ball of the rotating body 2372R will be described later.

  Next, the magnet 2372Rb will be described with reference to FIG. 94 (a) is a front view of the magnet 2372Rb, FIG. 94 (b) is a top view of the magnet 2372Rb, and FIG. 94 (c) is a side view of the magnet 2372Rb.

  As shown in FIGS. 94 (a) to 94 (c), the magnet 2372Rb is formed in a curved shape coaxial with the rotation axis of the first rotating body 2372Ra in a side view. Further, the magnet 2372Rb is formed to bend in the rotational direction of the rotating body 2372R toward the left side (left side in FIG. 94 (a)) when viewed from the front.

  The rotating body 2372R configured as described above is assembled as follows. First, one side of the magnet 2372Rb is inserted inside the recess 2372Ra2 of the first rotating body 2372Ra. Next, the first rotating body 2372Ra and the second rotating body 2372Rc are fastened by inserting the magnet 2372Rb protruding from the recess 2372Ra2 of the first rotating body 2372Ra into the recess 2372Rc1 of the second rotating body 2372Rc, thereby fastening the rotating body. 2372R is assembled.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 95 and FIG. 96, description will be given with reference to adsorption of the rotating body 2372R and the game ball. FIGS. 95A to 95C are top views of the variable unit 2360. FIG. 96A is a schematic cross-sectional view of the variable unit 2360 taken along the line XCVIa-XCVIa in FIG. 95A, and FIG. 96B is a diagram of the variable unit 2360 taken along the line XCVIb-XCVIb in FIG. FIG. 96C is a schematic cross-sectional view of the variable unit 2360 taken along the line XCVIc-XCVIc in FIG. 95C. 95 (a) to 95 (c) illustrate the transition state of the sphere. In FIGS. 95 (a) to 95 (c), the magnet 2372Rb is shown by a broken line.

  As shown in FIGS. 95 (a) and 96 (a), when the magnet 2372Rb on the first rotating body 2372Ra side is adjacent to the sixth pitching path KR6, a game ball is sent to the sixth pitching path KR6. The sphere is attracted to the outer peripheral surface of the first rotating body 2372Ra by the magnetic force of the magnet 2372Rb.

  As shown in FIG. 95 (b) and FIG. 96 (b), when the rotating body 2372R is rotated around the axis while the game ball is adsorbed on the outer peripheral surface of the first rotating body 2372Ra, the ball , The sixth pitching path KR6 is sent while being displaced downward.

  That is, in the portion that slows down the rolling of the game ball, when the magnet 2372Rb is positioned adjacent to the second rolling portion 381c due to the rotational displacement of the rotating body 2372R, the gaming ball moves through the second rolling portion 381c. The rolling of the game ball can be slowed by rolling. In addition, since the magnet 2372Rb is formed to be bent around the rotation axis of the rotating body 2372R, the rotating body 2372R rotates at the position where the magnet 2372Rb and the second rolling portion 381c are adjacent to each other. It can be displaced to the suction position side of 2372R. Accordingly, the game ball whose speed of rolling the second rolling portion 381c by the magnet 2372Rb is slowed can be rolled radially outward of the attracting position in accordance with the rotational displacement of the rotating body 2372R. Thereby, the game ball whose speed of rolling the second rolling portion 381c is slowed can be adsorbed to the rotating body 2372R.

  Here, a substantially cylindrical rotating member that is formed to be rotatable in a posture in which the rotation axis is directed in the horizontal direction, and a magnet that is disposed on the rotating member and attracts the game ball to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member, 2. Description of the Related Art A gaming machine is known in which a rotating member is rotated in a state in which a game ball is adsorbed on an outer peripheral surface, thereby sending the game ball in the rotation direction of the rotating member. However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, since the game ball rolls while rolling on the rolling surface, the rotating member rotates, and the gaming ball rolls on the rolling surface at a timing at which it can face the suction position of the rotating member. Even when it has moved, there is a problem that the game ball is difficult to be attracted to the attracting position.

  On the other hand, according to the second embodiment, the magnet 2372Rb is at least at an adsorption position where the game ball is attracted to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 2372R and an upstream position upstream of the rolling surface from the adsorption position. Therefore, the game ball can be attracted to the outer peripheral surface side of the rotating body 2372R by the magnetic force of the magnet 2372Rb arranged at the upstream position, and the game ball rolls while the game ball swings on the rolling surface. Can be suppressed. As a result, when the rotating body 2372R is rotated and the game ball rolls on the rolling surface at a timing at which the rotating body 2372R can face the attracting position, the game ball can be easily attracted to the attracting position.

  The magnet 2372Rb disposed at the attracting position and the magnet 2372Rb disposed at the upstream position may be formed separately (that is, two magnets 2372Rb) or may be formed integrally. (That is, one magnet 2372Rb).

  Here, it is necessary that the game ball is attracted to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 2372R at the attracting position, while the game ball is not attracted to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 2372R at the upstream position. This can be achieved by the difference in the magnetic force of the magnet 2372Rb (ie, the magnet 2372Rb having a strong magnetic force is disposed at the attracting position and the magnet 2372Rb having a weak magnetic force is disposed at the upstream position). It is necessary to prepare the magnet 2372Rb, resulting in an increase in product cost.

  On the other hand, according to the second embodiment, the rotating body 2372R includes the groove portion 2372Rc2 that is recessed in the outer peripheral surface and serves as the attracting position. Therefore, by embedding one magnet 2372Rb in the rotating body 2372R, the groove portion Using 2372Rc2, the distance from the magnet 2372Rb to the game ball at the attracting position (the distance from the magnet 2372Rb to the bottom of the groove 2372Rc2), the distance from the magnet 2372Rb to the game ball at the upstream position) from the magnet 2372Rb to the rotating body 2372R The distance can be set smaller than the distance to the outer peripheral surface. That is, the game ball can be attracted to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 2372R at the attracting position, while the game ball cannot be attracted to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 2372R at the upstream position. Therefore, two types of magnets 2372Rb are not required, and it is not necessary to complicate the shape of the magnet 2372Rb, so that the product cost can be reduced correspondingly.

  Further, when the game ball is attracted to the attracting position, the game ball can be held by the groove portion 2372Rc2. Therefore, when the game ball is sent along with the rotation of the rotating body 2372R, it is possible to prevent the game ball from wobbling in the rotation direction of the rotating body 2372R, and as a result, it is possible to suppress the adsorption of the game ball from being released. .

  Here, when the ball feeding path KR5 for sending the game ball along the axis of the rotating body 2372R is formed, the game ball has a high rolling speed or the game ball wobbles the rolling surface. There was a problem that the rotating body 2372R could not be adsorbed.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, on the radially outer side of the rotating body 2372R, a fifth pitching path KR5 for rolling a game ball and feeding it to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 2372R is formed, and the fifth pitching path KR5. Is formed to extend in the axial direction of the rotating body 2372R, and the magnet 2372Rb extends to the upstream side of the fifth pitching path KR5 with respect to the attracting position of the rotating body 2372R and the game ball. The game ball that rolls along the path KR5 is slowed by the magnetic force of the magnet 2372Rb disposed on the rotating body 2372R, and the wobble of the second rolling portion 381c of the game ball is suppressed, thereby preventing the game ball from rolling. Can be adsorbed to the rotating body 2372R.

  In other words, the magnet 2372Rb disposed on the rotating body 2372R extends to the upstream side of the second rolling portion 381c with respect to the attracting position between the rotating body 2372R and the game ball. The magnetic force of the magnet can be applied. Accordingly, by pulling the game ball rolling on the first feeding surface to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 2372R by the action of the magnet 2372Rb, the pitching speed can be slowed and the second rolling part 381c is swung and rolled. The wobbling of the playing ball can be eliminated. As a result, the game ball can be adsorbed on the adsorption surface of the rotating body 2372R and the game ball.

  Further, in the second rolling portion 381c, a partition wall 2381g arranged to face the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 2372R as the lateral width with respect to the rolling direction of the game ball goes downstream is brought close to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body. The That is, since the second rolling portion 381c is narrowed toward the downstream side, when the game ball rolling on the second rolling portion 381c swings to the left and right with respect to the pitching direction, the game ball rolls. As a result, shaking can be suppressed.

  In particular, in the second embodiment, the magnetic force of the magnet 2372Rb disposed on the rotating body 2372R acts on the upstream side of the second rolling portion 381c from the adsorption position of the rotating body 2372R and the game ball, so the magnet 2372Rb Since the swinging motion of the game ball rolling on the first sending surface can be suppressed together with the magnetic force, the swinging of the game ball can be suppressed at a relatively short rolling distance.

  In other words, it includes a partition wall 2381g that stands up from the second rolling portion 381c and faces the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 2372R, and partitions the rolling region of the game ball. The outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 2372R and the partition wall 2381g Is set to a smaller dimension toward the downstream side of the second rolling portion 381c, not only the action by the magnet at the upstream position (attraction by magnetic force), but also by guidance by the partition wall 2381g, It is possible to prevent the game ball from rolling while swinging in the second rolling part 381c. As a result, when the rotating body 2372R is rotated and the game ball rolls on the second rolling portion 381c at a timing at which the rotating body 2372R can face the adsorption position, the game ball can be easily adsorbed to the adsorption position. .

  Further, since the end of the groove 2372Rc2 on the upstream side of the second rolling portion 381c is connected to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 2372R, the axial direction of the rotating body 2372R is caused by the magnetic force of the portion that slows the rolling of the game ball. When the game ball drawn in is rolled into the groove 2372Rc2 of the rotating body 2372R, it can be prevented from bouncing. As a result, the game ball can be smoothly adsorbed inside the groove 2372Rc2.

  In addition, the length dimension along the rotation axis direction of the third rolling portion 381d is set to be larger than the length dimension along the rotation axis direction of the magnet disposed on the rotating body 2872R. Even if the game ball is sent to the place that is not attracted to the position of the body 2872R (that is, attracted to the magnet at the upstream position) and the game ball is sent along with the rotation of the rotating body 2872R. The game ball can be received by the third rolling part 381d.

  As shown in FIG. 95 (c) and FIG. 96 (c), the game ball adsorbed to the outside of the first rotating body 2372Ra flows down the fifth pitching path KR5 and enters the groove 2372Rc2 of the second rotating body 2372Rc. When attracted, as in the first embodiment, the game ball can be sent to the seventh pitch route KR7 by rotating the rotating body 2372R while adsorbing the game ball inside the groove 2372Rc2. .

  Here, the magnet 2372Rb disposed inside the rotating body 2372R extends in the axial direction of the rotating body 2372R from the adsorption position of the rotating body 2372R and the game ball, and rolls on the third rolling portion 381d. In the case where the ball-sending direction of the game ball is formed along the axial direction of the rotating body 2372R, the gaming ball rolling on the third rolling part 381d is affected by the magnetic force of the magnet 2372Rb disposed on the rotating body 2372R. There is a risk of receiving.

  On the other hand, according to the second embodiment, on the radially outer side of the rotating body 2372R, the game ball adsorbed to the rotating body 2372R is separated from the second rolling portion 381c across the rotating body 2372R. A third rolling portion 381d that rolls and sends the game ball is formed, and the third rolling portion 381d is inclined downward from the second rolling portion 381c toward the third rolling portion 381d. Therefore, the third rolling portion 381d can prevent the game ball released from being adsorbed to the rotating body 2372R from being adsorbed to the rotating body 2372R again.

  That is, the direction in which the game ball is sent in the third rolling portion 381d is formed in a direction away from the rotating body 2372R in the radially outward direction. Thereby, the game ball sent to the third rolling part 381d is attracted again to the outer periphery of the rotating body 2372R, or the magnetic force of the magnet 2372Rb is applied, and the speed of rolling the third rolling part 381d is slow. Can be suppressed.

  Further, the third rolling portion 381d is formed larger than the axial dimension of the rotating body 2372R, and is disposed at a position facing the rotating body 2372R, so that the outer peripheral surface other than the suction position of the rotating body 2372R. When the game ball is adsorbed to the third rolling unit 381d and released to the third rolling unit 381d, the third rolling unit 381d releases the adsorption of the rotating body 2372R and the game ball, and the game ball is moved to the third rolling unit. The ball can be sent to 381d.

  Moreover, since at least a part of the portion disposed at the upstream position of the magnet 2372Rb is disposed on the front side in the rotation direction of the rotating body 2372R relative to the portion disposed at the suction position, the magnet 2372Rb is directed toward the suction position. The magnetic force of the magnet 2372Rb at the upstream position can be easily applied to the game ball with respect to the game ball rolling on the second rolling portion 381c. That is, it is possible to prevent the game ball from rolling while swinging in the second rolling portion 381c by attracting the game ball to the outer peripheral surface side of the rotating body 2372R. As a result, when the rotating body 2372R is rotated and the game ball rolls on the second rolling portion 381c at a timing at which the rotating body 2372R can face the adsorption position, the game ball can be easily adsorbed to the adsorption position. .

  Further, the bottom surface of the groove portion 2372Rc2 is inclined upward toward the upstream position and smoothly connected to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 2372R, and at least at the upstream position side, the game ball can be brought into contact with the bottom surface of the groove portion 2372Rc2. Therefore, when the game ball attracted to the outer peripheral surface side of the rotating body 2372R by the magnet 2372Rb at the upstream position is fitted into the groove 2372Rc2 by the magnet 2372Rb at the attracting position, the game ball is fitted into the groove 2372Rc2. It can be done smoothly. That is, it is possible to suppress the game ball from bouncing (bound) and to easily attract the game ball to the suction position (groove portion 2372Rc2).

  Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 97 and 98. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the radially inner surface of the groove portion 372Rc2 of the rotating body 372R is formed on a plane orthogonal to the radial direction has been described, but the groove portion 3372Ra2 of the third embodiment has a radially inner surface. The case where it inclines with respect to the direction orthogonal to a radial direction is demonstrated.

  FIG. 97 (a) is a side view of the rotator 3372R in the third embodiment, FIG. 97 (b) is a top view of the rotator 3372, and FIG. 97 (c) is a plan view of FIG. 97 (b). FIG. 97D is a cross-sectional view taken along line XCVIIc-XCVIIc, and FIG. 97D is a cross-sectional view taken along line XCVIId-XCVIId in FIG. 97B. 98A and 98B are cross-sectional views of the variable unit 360. FIG. The cross section in FIG. 98 (a) corresponds to the cross section in FIG. 69 (a), and the cross section in FIG. 98 (b) corresponds to the cross section in FIG. 69 (b).

  97A to 97D, the rotating body 3372R in the third embodiment is connected to the first rotating body 372Ra disposed on the main body 380 side and the first rotating body 372Ra. The second rotary body 3372Rc and a magnet 372Rb that is disposed inside the second rotary body 3372Rc and applies a magnetic force to the outside of the second rotary body 3372Rc are mainly formed.

  The second rotator 3372Rc is formed in a cylindrical shape having an outer diameter substantially the same as the outer diameter of the first rotator 372Ra, and is disposed coaxially with the first rotator 372Ra and attached to the first rotator 372Ra. Is done.

  The second rotating body 372Rc is a ball feeding member that attracts and sends a game ball to the outer circumferential surface, and is recessed on the outer circumferential surface on the radially outer side of the concave portion 3372Rc1 into which the magnet 372Rb is inserted. The groove portion 3372Rc2 is mainly provided.

  The recess 3372Rc1 is recessed on the surface to which the first rotating body 372Ra is attached, and is recessed at substantially the same depth as the outer diameter of the magnet 372Rb. Further, the recess 3372Rc1 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the side, and one of the two opposing inner surfaces is formed in parallel with a recessed tip end surface of a groove 3372Rc2 described later.

  The groove portion 3372Rc2 is recessed in a substantially rectangular shape in the radial direction of the second rotating body 3372Rc, and a cross section of the second rotating body 3372Rc in the axial direction is formed in a substantially triangular shape. That is, the groove portion 3372Rc2 is formed by connecting the concave distal end surface of the second rotating body 3372Rc on the rotation direction side to the outer peripheral surface of the second rotating body 3372Rc.

  As described above, the recess 3372Rc1 of the second rotating body 3372Rc is formed to have an inner surface parallel to the recessed tip end surface of the groove 3372Rc2. As a result, the magnet 372Rb disposed inside the groove 3372Rc2 is disposed in a state where the end of the rotating body 3372R on the rotational direction side is partially located radially outward (see FIG. 97C). .

  Next, the rotational displacement of the rotating body 3372R will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIGS. 98 (a) and 98 (b), when the game ball is sent through the sixth pitching path KR6 when the groove portion 3372Rc2 of the rotating body 3372R is positioned adjacent to the sixth pitching path KR6. Similarly to the first embodiment, the game ball is attracted to the groove 3372Rc2 by the magnet 372Rb disposed inside the rotating body (see FIG. 98 (a)).

  When the rotating body 3372R is rotationally displaced around the axis of the connecting rod 371 with the game ball shown in FIG. 98 (a) adsorbed to the rotating body 3372R, the gaming ball is rotated as shown in FIG. 98 (b). The ball is fed while being adsorbed by the groove 3372Rc2 of 3372R.

  In the third embodiment, as described above, the concave front end surface of the groove portion 3372Rc2 on the rotation direction side of the second rotating body 3372Rc is formed to be connected to the outer peripheral surface of the second rotating body 3372Rc, so that the game ball is rotated. The body 3372R can be easily detached in the rotation direction.

  That is, since the stepped step is not formed on the rotation direction side of the groove portion 3372Rc2, the game ball attracted to the groove portion 3372Rc2 can be easily displaced in the rotation direction side. This makes it easier for the game ball adsorbed to the groove 3372Rc2 of the rotating body to fall to the seventh pitching path side of the subsequent pitching path when the attraction is released due to shaking of the gaming machine body or the like. As a result, when the adsorbing of the rotating body 3372R and the game ball is released, the game ball can be prevented from returning to the sixth pitching path, and the game ball of the rotating body 3372R can be stabilized.

  In this case, each of the rotators 3372Ra and 3372Rc of the rotator 3372R is formed in a cylindrical shape, so that the game ball can be sent along the outer peripheral surface to the seventh throw path KR7. Thereby, the adsorption of the rotating body 3372R and the game ball is released, and when the game ball is dropped onto the seventh throwing path KR7, the free fall distance of the game ball can be reduced, so that the game ball can be reduced to the seventh throwing path KR7. The impact at the time of dropping on the third rolling part 381d can be reduced. As a result, the game ball can be prevented from jumping up due to the collision with the third rolling portion 381d, and the game ball can be sent stably.

  Furthermore, in the third embodiment, since the rotation direction end of the rotating body 3372R of the magnet 372Rb is disposed in a state partially located on the radially outer side, the magnet 372Rb acts on the outside of the rotating body 3372R accordingly. The magnetic force of the magnet can be increased. As a result, it is possible to prevent the adsorption of the rotating body 3372R and the game ball from being released, and it is possible to further stabilize the game ball.

  Next, a rotating body 4372R in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In the first embodiment, the preceding game ball is prevented from dropping out of the groove portion 372Rc2 when the subsequent game ball sucked in the preceding game ball adsorbed in the groove portion 372Rc2 of the rotating body 372R is adsorbed later. In the fourth embodiment, when the succeeding game ball that was later fed to the preceding game ball attracted to the groove portion 372Rc2 of the rotating body 4372R is attracted, the preceding game ball and the succeeding game ball are explained. A case where the game ball falls off from the groove 372Rc2 will be described.

  First, the rotating body 4372R in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 99 (a) is a side view of the rotating body 4372R in the fourth embodiment, FIG. 99 (b) is a top view of the rotating body 4372R, and FIG. 99 (c) is the same as FIG. 99 (b). It is sectional drawing of the rotary body 4372R in a XCIXc-XCIXc line, FIG.99 (d) is sectional drawing of the rotary body 4372R in the XCIXd-XCIXd line | wire of FIG.99 (b).

  The rotating body 4372R is disposed inside the first rotating body 372Ra disposed on the main body 380 side, the second rotating body 4372Rc connected to the first rotating body 372Ra, and the second rotating body 4372Rc. And a magnet 372Rb having a magnetic force.

  The second rotating body 4372Rc is formed in a cylindrical shape having an outer shape substantially the same as the outer shape of the first rotating body 372Ra, and is disposed on the same axis as the first rotating body 372Ra and attached to the first rotating body 372Ra. .

  The second rotating body 4372Rc is a portion that attracts and sends a game ball on the outer peripheral surface, and has a concave portion 372Rc1 into which a later-described magnet 372Rb is inserted, and a concave portion on the outer peripheral surface on the radially outer side of the concave portion 372Rc1. The groove portion 372Rc2 is provided, and the groove portion 372Rc2 and a recessed portion 4372Rc5 that is recessed on the outer peripheral surface with a predetermined interval are mainly provided.

  The recessed portion 4372Rc5 is formed as a curved surface (spherical surface) whose center is located on the radially outer side of the rotating body 4372R, and the radius of the sphere forming the curved surface is set to be larger than the radius of the game ball. The

  In the fourth embodiment, the predetermined interval between the groove portion 372Rc2 and the recessed portion 4372Rc5 is such that when a game ball following the preceding game is adsorbed in a direction opposite to the rotation direction of the rotating body 4372R, The following game ball is set to a distance that does not come into contact with the radially outer end surface (the outer peripheral surface excluding the recessed portion 4372Rc5) of the rotating body 4372R.

  Next, a case where two game balls are attracted to the rotating body 4372R will be described with reference to FIGS. 100 to 102 are sectional views of the variable unit 360 and the rear base 390. FIG.

  100 to 102 correspond to the cross sections of the variable unit 360 and the back base 390 of FIG. 69 (a). 100 to 102, transition states when the rotating body 4372R is rotated are illustrated in order.

  As shown in FIG. 100, when two game balls are continuously sent to the sixth pitch route KR6 (following game balls are sent in succession to the preceding game balls), the preceding game balls are: It is attracted by the magnetic force of the magnet 372Rb disposed on the inner peripheral surface of the groove 372Rc2, and is attracted to the inner surface of the groove 372Rc2. In this case, because the preceding game ball is magnetized by the magnetic force of the magnet 372Rb, when the following game ball is sent in succession to the preceding game ball, the following game ball is attracted to the preceding game ball. The

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 100, before the following game ball is attracted to the preceding game ball and lifted from the second rolling unit 381c, the following game ball is moved to the second rolling unit. Since it is supported by 381c, it is not guided to the inside of the recessed portion 4372Rc5, and is positioned outside the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 4372R.

  As shown in FIG. 101, when the rotating body 4372R is rotated from the position shown in FIG. 100, the following game ball is lifted from the second rolling portion 381c. In this case, the subsequent game ball displaces the suction position with the outer peripheral surface of the preceding game ball by its own weight.

  Therefore, when the following game ball is lifted from the second rolling portion 381c, it is displaced to the inside of the recessed portion 4372Rc5, so that the weight of the following game ball can be easily applied to the preceding game ball. . As a result, as shown in FIG. 102, the adsorption between the preceding game ball and the inside of the groove 372Rc2 can be easily released.

  Further, as described above, the following game ball is displaced to the inside of the recessed portion 4372Rc5 when it is lifted from the second rolling portion 381c. In this case, the load of the following game ball can be applied to the preceding game ball along with the displacement when the game ball is lifted. As a result, as shown in FIG. 102, the adsorption between the preceding game ball and the inside of the groove 372Rc2 can be easily released.

  If the rotating body 4370 is further rotated from the position of FIG. 101 in a state where the suction between the preceding game ball and the inside of the groove portion 372Rc2 is released, the preceding game ball and the following game ball are moved to the second roll. Dropped to the moving part 381c. Note that the preceding and following game balls dropped from the rotating body 5372R fall on the upper surface of the second rolling part 381c and roll on the second rolling part 381c. Therefore, the preceding and following game balls dropped from the rotating body 5372R roll on the second rolling portion 381c, and are guided and collected inside the collection hole 373Ra formed in the inner cover 373R.

  As described above, in the fourth embodiment, when two balls are adsorbed on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 4372R, both of the two balls can be dropped from the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 4372R. That is, it is advantageous for the player if the game ball is attracted to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 4372R and sent to the seventh throwing path KR7. However, if two balls are attracted and sent, it is disadvantageous for the player. Since the situation can be changed, the result is different depending on whether only one ball is adsorbed or the second ball is adsorbed, and the player pays attention to the game ball rolling on the sixth throwing path KR6. Can do.

  Here, a substantially cylindrical rotating member that is formed to be rotatable in a posture in which the rotation axis is directed in the horizontal direction, and a magnet that is disposed on the rotating member and attracts the game ball to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member, A gaming machine is known in which a rotating ball is rotated in a state where a gaming ball is adsorbed on the outer peripheral surface, and the gaming ball is sent in the direction of rotation of the rotating member (in this case, toward the rotating member). When two game balls are rolled in a row, the preceding game ball (first game ball) is attracted to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member, and the preceding game ball (first game ball) is attracted. When the following game ball (second game ball) is adsorbed, both the preceding game ball and the following game ball are sent in the rotation direction of the rotating member. , There is a problem that it is not possible to give the player enough entertainment .

  On the other hand, according to the fourth embodiment, when the game ball preceding the magnet 372Rb of the rotating body 4372R is attracted and the following game ball is magnetized, the rotating body 4372R Since the release means that makes it easy to release the adsorption between the magnet 372Rb and the preceding game ball is provided, it is possible to prevent both the preceding game ball and the subsequent game ball from being sent in the rotation direction of the rotating body 4372R.

  That is, when only the preceding game ball rolls toward the rotating body 4372R and is attracted to the outer peripheral surface (magnet 372Rb) of the rotating body 4372R, the preceding game ball is sent in the rotation direction of the rotating body 4372R. On the other hand, in addition to the preceding game ball, the following game ball also rolls toward the rotating body 4372R, and the preceding gaming ball is attracted to the outer peripheral surface (magnet 372Rb) of the rotating body 4372R and the preceding gaming ball. When the succeeding game ball is adsorbed on the rear side, it is possible to prevent both the preceding game ball and the subsequent game ball from being sent in the rotation direction of the rotating body 4372R. When the moving portion 381c (sixth pitching path KR6) rolls toward the rotating body 4372R, another game ball (that is, the following game ball) rolls behind the preceding game ball. Medicine can be a concern to the player (cell pounding). As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Here, in the fourth embodiment, the V winning member 382 into which the game ball attracted to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 4372R and sent in the rotation direction of the rotating body 4372R enters and the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 4372R is adsorbed. And a recovery hole 373Ra into which a game ball that has not been entered enters, at least when the game ball enters the V winning member 382, a profit is given to the player, or by entering the V winning member 382, the player is given a profit. Since the profit to be given is higher than the profit to be given to the player by entering the collection hole 373Ra, it is possible to improve the interest of the game from this point.

  That is, the player expects to gain profit by entering the V winning member 382 or higher profit than the case of entering the recovery hole 373Ra. In the hope that it will be attracted to the surface and sent in the direction of rotation of the rotating body 4372R, and in the hope that more opportunities will be given to profits, more game balls will be placed on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 4372R. It is desired to be attracted and sent in the rotation direction of the rotating body 4372R. On the other hand, when only the preceding game ball is attracted to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 4372R, the preceding game ball can be sent in the rotation direction (V winning member 382) of the rotating body 4372R, while the rotating body When a subsequent game ball is adsorbed to the preceding game ball adsorbed on the outer peripheral surface of 4372R, not only the following game ball but also the preceding game ball is sent in the rotation direction of the rotating body 4372R. Therefore, the opportunity to enter the V winning member 382 from both sides is lost. Therefore, when the preceding game ball rolls toward the rotating body 4372R, the player determines whether another game ball (that is, the following game ball) has been rolled behind the preceding game ball. It is easy to be worried about (it is easy to be thrilled), and as a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

  In addition, as a form with a high profit given to the player, there is a form in which a lot of prize balls are paid out with the entry, a third entrance (recess 311a and upper part by opening and closing the wing part 312 that can be opened and closed) A mode in which the opening time of the wing part 312 allowing / restricting entry to the front cover 313) is increased, a mode in which the number of times of opening the wing part 312 is increased, and an opening range of the wing part 312 is increased. And the like are exemplified.

  Further, the release means is formed as a recessed portion 4372Rc5 that is recessed in the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 4372R and receives the subsequent game ball adsorbed by the preceding game ball. The following game ball can be brought closer to the side, and the gravity direction component of the weight of the following game ball acting on the preceding game ball can be easily increased accordingly. Therefore, it is possible to easily release the attraction between the preceding game ball and the magnet 372Rb.

  That is, when the following game ball is attracted to the preceding game ball, the weight of the following game ball is used to release the adsorption between the magnet 372Rb and the preceding game ball, When the game ball that follows the preceding game ball is not attracted, the adsorption of the magnet 372Rb and the preceding game ball can be prevented from being released. Further, since such switching can be achieved only by means utilizing the weight of the following game ball, that is, only by the recessed portion 4372Rc5 that is recessed in the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 4372R, the displacement member for switching In addition, it is unnecessary to provide a driving source, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

  Next, a rotating body 5372R according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In the first embodiment, the preceding game ball is prevented from dropping out of the groove portion 372Rc2 when the subsequent game ball sucked in the preceding game ball adsorbed in the groove portion 372Rc2 of the rotating body 372R is adsorbed later. In the fifth embodiment, the following game balls and the following game balls are attracted to the preceding game balls attracted to the groove portion 5372Rc2 of the rotating body 5372R when the succeeding game balls are attracted. A case where the game ball drops off from the groove 5372Rc2 will be described.

  In the fifth embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the right-handed transfer ball part 370R and the left-handed transfer ball part 370L are provided with a driving means and a transmission means for transmitting the drive to the right-handed transfer ball part 370R. The other shapes are symmetrical with respect to the center in the left-right direction of the variable unit 360, and thus detailed description of the rotating body 5372L of the left-handed transfer ball portion 370L is omitted.

  103 is an exploded perspective front view of a rotating body 5372R according to the fifth embodiment, FIG. 104 (a) is a side view of the rotating body 5372R, and FIG. 104 (b) is a top view of the rotating body 5372R. 104C is a cross-sectional view of the rotator 5372R along the line CIVc-CIVc in FIG. 104B, and FIG. 104D is a rotator 5372R along the line CIVd-CIVd in FIG. 104B. FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 103 and 104, the rotating body 5372R in the fifth embodiment includes a first rotating body 372Ra disposed on the main body 380 side and a second rotating body connected to the first rotating body 372Ra. 5372Rc, a magnet 372Rb having magnetic force disposed inside the second rotating body 5372Rc, and a release member 5372Rd disposed along the outer edge of the second rotating body 5372Rc are mainly formed.

  The second rotator 5372Rc is formed in a cylindrical shape having an outer diameter substantially the same as the outer diameter of the first rotator 372Ra, and its axis is disposed on the same axis as the first rotator 372Ra. It is attached to 372Ra.

  Further, the second rotating body 5372Rc is formed on the outer peripheral surface in a groove portion 5372Rc2 that is recessed radially inward, and on the radially inner side of the groove portion 5372Rc2, and is formed on the side surface of the rotating body 5372Rc. 372Rc1 and a recessed portion 5372Rc3 formed by notching a portion between the concave portion 372Rc1 and the groove portion 5372Rc2 and a portion adjacent to the groove portion 5372Rc2.

  Groove portion 5372Rc2 is formed in a substantially rectangular outer shape when viewed from the radial direction of rotating body 372R, and the outer shape is set larger than the outer shape of magnet 372Rb. Further, the groove portion 5372Rc2 is formed such that the surface located on the radially inner side of the rotating body 372R is a flat surface, and is partially formed by the recess portion 5372Rc3 as described above.

  The recessed portion 5372Rc3 is a space that accommodates a release member 5372Rd, which will be described later, in a notch formed in the rotating body 5372R, and the recessed shape is formed substantially the same as the outer shape of the release member 5372Rd.

  The release member 5372Rd has an outer shape that is substantially C-shaped in the radial direction of the rotating body 5372R. The release member 5372Rd is positioned between the release portion 5372Rd1 disposed inside the groove portion 5372Rc2, the pressing portion 5372Rd2 disposed along the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 5372R, and between the release portion 5372Rd1 and the pressing portion 5372Rd2. The through hole 5372Rd3 is formed mainly through the body 5372R in the axial direction.

  The release portion 5372Rd1 is disposed inside a recessed portion 5372Rc3 that is notched inside the groove portion 5372Rc2, and the surface on the outer peripheral side of the rotating body 5372R is disposed flush with the flat surface of the groove portion 5372Rc2. Thereby, the game ball sent to the inside of the groove portion 5372Rc2 can be attracted by the magnetic force of the magnet 372Rb disposed inside the recess portion 372Rc1.

  The pressing portion 5372Rd2 is formed so as to protrude outward in the radial direction from the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 5372R, and has a curved shape with a protruding tip surface protruding outward. In addition, the radius of the curved surface at the protruding front end surface of the pressing portion 5372 is set to be smaller than the radius of the rotating body 5372R. Therefore, the pressing portion 5372Rd2 can be easily protruded radially outward of the rotating body 5372R.

  Further, in a state where the release member 5372Rd is not displaced (the pressing portion 5372Rd2 is not displaced radially inward with respect to the rotating body 5372R), the pressing portion 5372Rd2 rotates at both ends in the circumferential direction of the rotating body 5327R. It is set at a position that continues to the outer peripheral surface of the body 5372R. That is, a step in the radial direction can be eliminated between the recessed portion 5372Rc3 and the pressing portion 5372Rd2 of the rotating body 5372R. As a result, when the game ball rolls on the second rolling portion 381c, the game ball rides on the step between the recessed portion 5372Rc3 and the pressing portion 5372Rd2 of the rotating body 5372R and the third rolling is caused by the rotation of the rotating body 5372R. It is possible to suppress the ball being sent to the portion 381d.

  The through hole 5372Rd3 is a through hole into which the shaft bar JB1 is inserted. The shaft bar JB is a shaft that rotatably holds the release member 5372Rd. The shaft bar JB is inserted into the through hole 5372Rd3 of the release member 5372Rd and has one end inside the shaft hole 5372Rc4 that is recessed in the side surface of the second rotary body 5372Rc. Is inserted and the other side is sandwiched between the side surfaces of the first rotating body 372Ra. As a result, the shaft bar JB1 can be prevented from falling off the assembled rotating body 5372R, and the release member 5372Rd can be rotatably supported.

  Next, the operation of the release member 5372Rd of the rotating body 5372R will be described with reference to FIGS. 105 and 106 are cross-sectional views of the variable unit 360 and the back base 390. FIG.

  105 and 106 correspond to the cross sections of the variable unit 360 and the back base 390 of FIG. FIG. 106 shows a state where the rotating body 5372R is slightly rotated from the position shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 105, when two game balls are continuously delivered on the sixth throwing path KR6, if the preceding game balls are attracted to the inner surface of the groove portion 5372Rc2, the preceding game balls are attracted by the magnet 372Rb. A game ball that is magnetized by a magnetic force is adsorbed to the outer peripheral surface thereof.

  When the rotating body 5372R is rotated in a state where the following game ball is attracted to the outer peripheral surface of the preceding game ball, the preceding game ball is lifted upward while being attracted to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 5372R. It is done. At this time, the succeeding game ball is displaced to the outer peripheral surface side of the rotating body 5372R by displacing the suction position with the preceding game ball.

  Here, the pressing portion 5372Rd2 of the release member 5372Rd disposed in the rotating body 5372R is a game ball that follows when the following game ball is attracted to the preceding game ball and lifted from the second rolling portion 381c. It is formed in a shape in which the protruding tip abuts on the outer peripheral surface of the.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 106, when the rotating body 5372R is rotated from the position of FIG. 105 and the following game ball is separated (lifted) from the second rolling portion 381c, the weight of the following game ball is increased. Thus, the pressing portion 5372Rd2 of the release member 5372Rd is pressed inward in the radial direction of the rotating body 5372R.

  Due to the displacement of the pressing portion 5372Rd2, the release member 5372Rd is rotationally displaced about the through hole 5372Rd3. Therefore, the release portion 5372Rd1 formed on the opposite side of the pressing portion 5372Rd2 across the through hole 5372Rd3 is displaced outward in the radial direction of the rotating body 5372R.

  Thereby, the preceding game ball adsorbed on the inner surface of the groove portion 5372Rc2 is pushed out from the inside of the groove portion 5372Rc2 with the displacement of the release portion 5372Rd1. Accordingly, the preceding game ball is displaced to a position spaced radially outward from the rotating body 5372R, and accordingly, is separated from the magnet 372Rb disposed inside the rotating body 5372R. As a result, the magnetic force attracting the preceding game ball to the inner surface of the groove portion 5372Rc2 is weakened, and the preceding game ball falls off from the outer peripheral surface (groove portion 5372Rc2) of the rotating body 5372R.

  In this case, as described above, the pressing portion 5372Rd2 of the release member 5372Rd disposed on the rotating body 5372R is when the following game ball is attracted to the preceding game ball and lifted from the second rolling portion 381c. Since the protruding tip abuts on the outer peripheral surface of the following game ball, the following game ball is displaced inward in the radial direction with respect to the rotating body 5372R when the subsequent game ball is lifted. The force due to its own weight can be maximized.

  As a result, when the subsequent game ball is attracted to the preceding game ball and lifted from the second rolling portion 381c, the release member 5372Rd can be easily displaced, and the preceding game ball can be turned into the rotating body 5372R (groove portion 5372Rc2). ) Can be easily removed.

  Note that the preceding and following game balls dropped from the rotating body 5372R fall on the upper surface of the second rolling part 381c and roll on the second rolling part 381c. Therefore, the preceding and following game balls dropped from the rotating body 5372R roll on the second rolling portion 381c, and are guided and collected inside the collection hole 373Ra formed in the inner cover 373R.

  As described above, in the fifth embodiment, when two balls are adsorbed on the outer peripheral surface of the rotator 5372R, they can be dropped from the outer peripheral surface of the rotator 5372R. That is, it is advantageous for the player if the game ball is attracted to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 5372R and sent to the seventh throwing path KR7, but if two balls are attracted, the situation is disadvantageous for the player. Therefore, it is possible to make a difference in the result depending on whether only one ball is adsorbed or two balls are adsorbed, and the player can pay attention to the game ball rolling on the sixth pitching path KR6.

  Here, a substantially cylindrical rotating member that is formed to be rotatable in a posture in which the rotation axis is directed in the horizontal direction, and a magnet that is disposed on the rotating member and attracts the game ball to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member, A gaming machine is known in which a rotating ball is rotated in a state in which a gaming ball is adsorbed on an outer peripheral surface, thereby sending the gaming ball in the rotation direction of the rotating member (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-231890). Publication). In this case, when two game balls are rolled continuously toward the rotating member, the preceding game ball (first game ball) is adsorbed to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member, and the preceding game ball. When the following game ball (second game ball) is adsorbed to the (first game ball), both the preceding game ball and the following game ball are sent in the rotation direction of the rotating member. However, in such a gaming machine, there is a problem that it is not possible to sufficiently give the player interest in gaming.

  On the other hand, according to the fifth embodiment, when the game ball preceding the magnet 372Rb of the rotating body 5372R is attracted and the following game ball is magnetically attached to the preceding game ball, the rotating body 5372R Since the release means for easily releasing the adsorption between the magnet 372Rb and the preceding game ball is provided, it is possible to prevent both the preceding game ball and the following game ball from being sent in the rotation direction of the rotating body 5372R.

  That is, when only the preceding game ball rolls toward the rotating body 5372R and is attracted to the outer peripheral surface (magnet 372Rb) of the rotating body 5372R, the preceding game ball is sent in the rotation direction of the rotating body 5372R. On the other hand, in addition to the preceding game ball, the following game ball also rolls toward the rotating body 5372R, and the preceding gaming ball is attracted to the outer peripheral surface (magnet 372Rb) of the rotating body 5372R and the preceding gaming ball. When the following game ball is adsorbed on the second ball, it is possible to prevent both the preceding game ball and the following game ball from being sent in the rotation direction of the rotating body 5372R. When rolling toward the other side, the player is concerned whether another game ball (that is, the following game ball) has been rolled behind the preceding game ball. ) It can be. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Here, in the fifth embodiment, a V winning member 382 into which a game ball attracted to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 5372R and sent in the rotation direction of the rotating body 5372R enters and is adsorbed to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 5372R. And a recovery hole 373Ra into which a game ball that has not been entered enters, at least when the game ball enters the V winning member 382, a profit is given to the player, or by entering the V winning member 382, the player is given a profit. Since the profit to be given is higher than the profit to be given to the player by entering the collection hole 373Ra, it is possible to improve the interest of the game from this point.

  That is, the player expects to gain profit by entering the V winning member 382 or higher profit than the case of entering the recovery hole 373Ra, and the game ball is placed on the outer periphery of the rotating body 5372R. In the hope that it will be attracted to the surface and sent in the direction of rotation of the rotating body 5372R, and in the hope that more opportunities will be given to profits, more game balls will be placed on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 5372R. It is desired to be attracted and sent in the rotation direction of the rotating body 5372R. On the other hand, when only the preceding game ball is attracted to the outer peripheral surface of the rotator 5372R, the preceding game ball can be sent in the rotation direction (V winning member 382) of the rotator 5372R, while the rotator When a subsequent game ball is attracted to the preceding game ball adsorbed on the outer peripheral surface of 5372R, not only the following game ball but also the preceding game ball is sent in the rotation direction of the rotating body 5372R. Therefore, the opportunity to enter the V winning member 382 from both sides is lost. Therefore, when the preceding game ball rolls toward the rotating body 5372R, the player determines whether another game ball (that is, the following game ball) has been rolled behind the preceding game ball. It is easy to be worried about (it is easy to be thrilled), and as a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

  In addition, since it is the same as that of 4th Embodiment as a form with the high profit provided to a player, the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  The release means includes a release member 5372Rd that is displaceably disposed on the rotating body 5372R, and the release member 5372Rd is displaced by being brought into contact with a subsequent game ball adsorbed by a preceding game ball. Since the distance between the preceding game ball and the magnet 372Rb is expanded by the displacement, when the subsequent game ball is adsorbed to the preceding game ball, the weight of the subsequent game ball is used. Then, when the adsorption of the magnet 372Rb and the preceding game ball is released, while the subsequent game ball is not attracted to the preceding game ball, the adsorption of the magnet 372Rb and the preceding game ball is not released. Can be. In addition, since such switching is performed by using the weight of the subsequent game ball, it is not necessary to provide a drive source for displacing the release member 5372Rd, thereby reducing the product cost accordingly. be able to.

  That is, according to the fifth embodiment, it is not necessary to arrange an urging member (for example, a torsion spring) that switches the release member 5372Rd. For example, even when the release portion 5372Rd1 of the release member 5372Rd is projected outward in the radial direction from the groove portion 5372Rc2, the release portion 5372Rd1 is pressed inside the groove portion 5372Rc2 by an adsorption operation to adsorb the game ball (the preceding game ball), Release part 5372Rd1 can be displaced to the radial inside of rotating body 5372R. As a result, the protruding tip of the pressing portion 5372Rd2 can be projected and displaced outward in the radial direction of the rotating body 5372R. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide a drive source for displacing the release member 5372Rd, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 107 and FIG. 108, a winning opening unit 6600 in the sixth embodiment will be described. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In the first embodiment, the game balls sent to the insides of the second through holes 631b and 633b formed on the left and right sides of the base plate 630 are directly inside the path member 640 disposed on the back surface of the base plate 630. In the sixth embodiment, the game balls to be sent inside the second through holes 631b and 633b formed on the left and right sides of the base plate 630 are disposed on the back surface of the base plate 630. A case will be described in which the ball passes through the sensor device SE1 that detects the passing of the game ball before being sent to the inside of the path member 640.

  FIG. 107 (a) is a front view of the winning opening unit 6600 in the sixth embodiment, and FIG. 107 (b) is a rear view of the winning opening unit 6600. FIG. 108 is an exploded perspective front view of the winning opening unit 6600.

  As shown in FIGS. 107 and 108, in the prize opening unit 6600 of the sixth embodiment, a sensor device SE1 is interposed between the base plate 630 and the path member 640 facing each other. The sensor device SE1 is disposed at a position on the back side of the second through holes 631b and 633b.

  The sensor device SE1 is formed with an opening SE1a penetratingly formed larger than the outer diameter of the game ball. The sensor device SE1 is interposed between the base plate 630 and the path member 640 facing each other with the opening SE1a opened in the front-rear direction. The sensor device SE1 can detect the passage of the game ball by passing the game ball inside the opening SE1a.

  Note that the game balls flowing down in the winning opening unit 6600 are only opposite to each other on the left and right sides. Therefore, in the following description, only the game balls flowing down the left side of the game board 13 will be described, and the right side of the game board 13 will be described. Description of the game ball flowing down is omitted.

  Next, a description will be given of when the game ball has flowed down the winning opening unit 6600. When the game ball flowing down the game area of the game board 13 flows down in the vicinity of the left winning opening 26 and flows between the left recess 631 and the left cover member 611, it is guided to the bottom surface of the left recess 631 and second The ball is sent inside the through-hole 631b.

  In this case, as described above, the sensor device SE1 is disposed on the back side of the second through hole 631b, so that the game ball that has flowed down between the left concave portion 631 and the left cover member 611 faces the sensor device SE1. After being detected, the ball is sent to the inside of the path member 640. That is, in the sixth embodiment, it is possible to detect a game ball sent to the inside of the route member 640.

  Therefore, after the sensor device SE1 detects the game ball, the game ball passing through the path member 640 is made variable by controlling the variable plate 652 of the variable winning device 650 to protrude to the front side after a predetermined time has elapsed. The ball can be easily sent to the upper part of the plate 652. As a result, the game ball passing through the path member 640 can be easily sent to the through hole 632a.

  For example, the predetermined time described above is set to be approximately the same as the time for the game ball to roll the first path 641 of the path member 640 from one end to the other end, so that the game ball can be changed to the variable plate of the variable winning device 650. It can be easily sent to the upper part of 652. As a result, it is possible to easily give a possibility that a game ball flowing down without winning in the left winning port 26 will win the through hole 632a again. As a result, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the downstream of the game ball to the downstream side, and it is possible to lengthen the time for the player to pay attention to the game ball.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the sensor device SE1 that detects a game ball flowing down the path member 640 and the drive unit that drives the variable plate 652 are provided, and when the game ball is detected by the detection member. Since the variable plate 652 is projected to the front side of the game board by driving the driving means, it is possible to easily enter the game ball into the through hole 632a. Therefore, even when a game ball does not enter the left start winning opening 26 and the right start winning opening 27, attention is paid to the flow of the game ball and the player is expected to enter the through hole 632a. Can be held. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Note that the detection of the game ball by the sensor device SE1 and the driving by the driving means (protrusion of the variable plate 652) may be performed at the same time, or the driving is started after the elapse of a predetermined time after the detection. Also good. However, in the latter case, it is preferable that the driving (projecting operation of the variable plate 652) is completed before the game ball reaches the projecting position of the variable plate 652. This is because the function of the variable plate 652 that guides the game ball to the through hole 632a (makes it easy to enter the ball) can be surely exhibited.

  Further, for example, the variable plate 652 of the variable winning device 650 may be set so as to protrude to the front side depending on the number of game balls passing through the sensor device SE1. In this case, it is possible to give a player a possibility of winning a prize in the through hole 632a when a predetermined number of game balls flowing in the vicinity without entering the left winning port 26 continue. Therefore, it is possible to increase the value of hitting the game ball in the game area of the game board 13 aiming at the left winning opening 26. Accordingly, the player can be made to launch the game ball 13 into the game area with the game ball aimed at a predetermined location, so that the player can easily focus on the route through which the game ball flows. As a result, it is possible to make the player search for the launch position of the game ball to the game area of the game board 13 that is more advantageous, and it is easy to give interest to the player.

  For example, when five game balls pass through the sensor device SE1, the variable plate 652 of the variable winning device 650 is set to protrude to the front side. In this case, it is possible to give the player the possibility that at least one ball will win the through-hole 632a when five game balls flowing down in the vicinity without entering the left winning port 26 continue.

  In this case, when three game balls (the number of balls less than the predetermined number) pass through the sensor device SE1, if the fourth game ball wins the left winning opening 26, The counting of the number of balls that have passed through the sensor device SE1 may be reset. Thereby, it can suppress that a game ball wins continuously to the winning opening 26 and the through-hole 632a. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the wing portion 312 that is opened when a game ball has won the winning opening 26 and the through hole 632a from being continuously opened. As a result, the timing of opening the wings 312 that is advantageous to the player can be dispersed, and the player's interest can be prevented from decreasing.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 109 to FIG. 111, a winning opening unit 7600 in the seventh embodiment will be described. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the possibility that a game ball is won in the through hole 632a is reduced when the variable plate 652 of the variable winning device 650 is positioned rearward has been described. In the embodiment, even when the variable plate 652 of the variable winning device 650 is in the rearward position, when two game balls are connected, the through hole 632a is easily formed. The state in which the variable plate 652 is located rearward is a state in which the variable plate 652 is immersed in the back side of the game board 13.

  First, with reference to FIG. 109 and FIG. 110, a winning opening unit 7600 in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 109 is a front view of a winning opening unit 7600 according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 110 is an exploded perspective front view of the winning opening unit 7600.

  As shown in FIG. 109 and FIG. 110, a winning opening unit 7600 according to the seventh embodiment is disposed so as to face the decorative board 7610 having a plurality of winning openings 26, 27, 28, and the decorative board 7610. A base plate 630 that forms a flow path for game balls, a path member 640 that forms a ball delivery path for game balls between the base plate 630, and the base plate 630. The decorative plate 7610 and the base plate 630 And a variable winning device 650 for guiding a game ball flowing down between the two to the through hole 632a.

  The decorative plate 7610 is formed of a left cover member 611 having a left start winning port 26, a right cover member 612 having a right start winning port 27, and a central cover member 7613 having a middle start winning port 28.

  The center cover member 7613 is formed from a horizontally-long rectangular plate-like body in a front view, and is disposed at the center of the left cover member 611 and the right cover member 612. The central cover member 7613 is formed with a through hole 7613e that penetrates from the front side to the back side.

  The through hole 7613e is formed in front of each of the two coupling holes 632b formed in the base plate 630 disposed to face the central cover member 7613. The connecting hole 632b is formed such that a width dimension opening in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 109) in the front view is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball so that the game ball can pass therethrough.

  Further, the through hole 7613e is formed at a position where the center position is shifted from the center position in the left-right direction of the connecting hole 632b to the outside in the left-right direction with respect to the base plate 630, and a part of the inner edge on the base plate 630 side is formed. The connecting hole 632b is formed at a position overlapping the central position in the left-right direction and the front-rear direction.

  Furthermore, the through-hole 7613e is recessed in a convex curved shape (spherical) from the back side to the front side (that is, the recessed depth increases as it goes away from the through-hole 632a). The inner diameter of the hole on the front side is set smaller than the outer diameter of the game ball. That is, the through hole 7613e is formed so as not to pass through the game ball.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 111, the game ball flowing down the winning opening unit 7600 will be described. 111 (a) to 111 (c) are cross-sectional views of the winning opening unit 7600 along the line CXI-CXI in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 111 (a), two game balls are continuously sent through the path member 640, and the preceding game ball is sent from the inside of the connection hole 632b to the center cover member 7613 side. In this case, as described above, the through hole 7613e is formed at a position where its center position is shifted from the center position in the left-right direction of the connecting hole 632b to the outside in the left-right direction with respect to the base plate 630, and on the base plate 630 side. Since a part of the inner edge portion is formed at a position that overlaps in the front-rear direction with the center position in the left-right direction of the coupling hole 632b, the preceding game ball is sent to a position slightly shifted left and right from the center of the through hole 7613e.

  Thereby, as shown in FIG. 111 (b), the preceding game ball is guided to the inner edge portion of the through hole 7613e, and is positioned in the left-right direction (FIG. 111 (b) left-right direction) at the center position of the through hole 7613e. Is displaced. Further, at this time, the through hole 7613e is formed in a convex curved shape from the back side to the front side of the center cover member 7613 (that is, as a concave portion in which the connection hole 632b side is opened), so that the leading hole 7613e is preceded. A game ball can be easily fastened to its inner edge.

  Next, when a subsequent game ball connected to the preceding game ball is sent from the inside of the connection hole 632b to the central cover member 7613 side, the preceding game ball is formed in the through hole 7613e formed in the central cover member 7613. The following game ball can be made to collide with the spherical surface on the center side with respect to the base plate 630 of the preceding game ball as much as it is guided to the inner edge and displaced outward in the left-right direction with respect to the base plate 630.

  Therefore, the following game ball can collide with the curved surface (spherical surface) of the base plate 630 of the preceding game ball in the left-right direction, so that the repulsive force generated in the following game ball due to the collision can be caused by the base plate 630. Can be directed to the center in the left-right direction (through hole 632a side). As a result, as shown in FIG. 111, the following game ball can be sent to the center side in the left-right direction (the through hole 632a side) of the base plate 630 and won in the through hole 632a.

  The preceding game ball drops from the inside of the through hole 7613e due to its own weight, and flows downward and is collected from the out port 71 formed in the game board 13.

  Thus, in the seventh embodiment, when there are two or more game balls flowing down in the vicinity of the left and right start winning openings 26 and 27, the inside of the path member 640 is continuously passed. By doing this, it is possible to make it easy to win the following game ball in the through hole 632a.

  That is, a gaming machine provided with a first entrance and a second entrance is known. In this case, the game balls that have not entered the first entrance are not entered into the second entrance, but only collected from the out entrance. Therefore, if a game ball launched at the first entrance does not enter the first entrance, the player expects the subsequent whereabouts of the game ball (the game ball flowing down). Can't have. For this reason, there has been a problem that it is not possible to give the player enough interest.

  On the other hand, according to the seventh embodiment, a path member 640 that forms a path of a game ball that flows down without entering the left and right start winning openings 26 and 27, and two game balls pass through the path member 640. In the case where the number of game balls is less than two, a change means (through hole 7613e) that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the through hole 632a than when one game ball passes through the path member 640 is provided. Therefore, even when the game balls do not enter the left and right start winning openings 26 and 27, the player continues to have an expectation to enter the through-hole 632a by paying attention to the flow of the game balls. Can be made. In particular, the ease of entering the through hole 632a is changed depending on the number of game balls passing through the path member 640 (two or more game balls that do not enter the start winning holes 26 and 27 and flow down in the vicinity thereof) In such a case, it is possible to produce a situation that is advantageous to the player), so that the player can also pay attention to the number of game balls that have leaked into the left and right start winning openings 26 and 27. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, as the path member 640, for example, a path formed as a closed passage through which a game ball can pass, a path formed by one or a plurality of nails that define the flow-down direction of the game ball, and the game ball can roll What is formed as an inclined surface (open passage) is exemplified.

  In addition, the changing means includes a restricting means for restricting the flow of the preceding game ball that passes through the route member 640 or flows out of the route member 640, and the restricting means includes a game ball that follows the preceding game ball. In the case of continuous (continuous), the following game ball is brought into contact (collision) with the preceding game ball whose flow is restricted so that the flow direction of the following game ball is directed toward the through hole 632a. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. That is, it is easier to enter the through hole 632a when the preceding game ball and the following game ball flow down than when only the preceding game ball flows down (the game ball passing through the path member 640). The ease of entering the through hole 632a can be changed depending on the number), so that the player can also pay attention to the number of game balls that leaked into the left and right start winning openings 26 and 27. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Further, since the restricting means is formed as a through hole 7613e that is recessed in the wall surface facing the outlet of the path member 640, the preceding game ball that has flowed out of the outlet of the path member 640 is received in the through hole 7613e, Can be temporarily restricted (ie, the preceding game ball can be temporarily held so that the following game ball can collide), while the flow of the preceding game ball is restricted. The release can be performed by dropping (flowing down) the preceding game ball from the through hole 7613e by its own weight. Therefore, it is possible to restrict (hold) and cancel the flow of the preceding game ball only with the shape of the restricting means, and to eliminate the need for an operation mechanism for switching (releasing the restriction). It can be simplified and the product cost can be reduced.

  In addition, a member that guides the game ball flowing out from the exit of the path member 640 to the through hole 632a (for example, a rolling surface that is inclined downward toward the through hole 632a is provided, and the game ball is rolled on the rolling surface. Thus, there is no variable plate 652 that makes it easy to enter the game ball into the through hole 632a (the variable plate 652 is formed so as to be displaceable between a position where the guide ball 652 can be guided to the through hole 632a and a position where it cannot be guided. Even in a state where the guide ball is displaced to a position where it cannot be guided, a subsequent game ball can be inserted into the through hole 632a using the through hole 7613e.

  Further, the connecting hole 632b includes a bottom surface on which the game ball rolls and a side wall surface that is provided to stand on both sides in the width direction of the bottom surface, and the interval between the side wall surfaces is substantially equal to the diameter of the game ball. Since the dimensions are set, the trajectory of the game ball flowing out from the outlet of the path member 640 can be made almost constant, and the game ball can be reliably received by the restricting means (through hole 7613e).

  Further, since the through hole 7613e has a recessed depth that increases toward the direction away from the through hole 632a, a direction in which the recessed depth of the game ball received in the through hole 7613e is increased (that is, the through hole 7613e). It is possible to hold the position shifted to the side away from the hole 632a. Therefore, when the following game ball is brought into contact (collision) with the preceding game ball held in the through hole 7613e, the following game ball can be easily directed toward the through hole 632a.

  Furthermore, it is provided with a variable plate 652 which is formed so as to be capable of appearing and retracting and is disposed at a position between the outlet of the path member 640 and the through hole 7613e and below the gravitational direction. In this state, the game ball is formed so as to be guided to the through hole 632a, so that the preceding game ball held in the through hole 7613e enters the through hole 632a by using the protruding variable plate 652. Can be balled. That is, when the preceding game ball is dropped (dropped) from the through hole 7613e, the preceding game ball can be received by the variable plate 652 and guided to the through hole 632a by the variable plate 652. As a result, the preceding game ball can enter the through hole 632a.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 112 to FIG. 116, a winning opening unit 8600 in the eighth embodiment will be described. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the possibility that a game ball is won in the through hole 632a is reduced in a state where the variable plate 652 of the variable winning device 650 is positioned rearward. However, in the eighth embodiment, the variable winning device 650 is variable. Even in a state where the variable plate 652 of the winning device 650 is located rearward, it is easy to win the through-hole 632a when two game balls are linked and sent through the path member 8640.

  FIG. 112 is an exploded perspective front view of the winning opening unit 8600 in the eighth embodiment. 113 (a) is a front view of the path member 8640, and FIG. 113 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the path member 8640 along the CXIIIb-CXIIIb line in FIG. 113 (a).

  In FIG. 113, the accommodation portion 8443 formed in the path member 8640 is omitted. In FIG. 113, the connecting hole 632b and the second connecting hole 8632e of the base plate 630 disposed on the front side of the path member 8640 are illustrated by two-dot chain lines.

  As shown in FIG. 112 and FIG. 113, the winning opening unit 8600 according to the eighth embodiment is disposed so as to face the decorative board 610 having a plurality of winning openings 26, 27, 28, and the decorative board 610. A base plate 630 that forms a flow path for game balls, a path member 8640 that forms a pitch path for game balls between the base plate 630, and the base plate 8630, and a decorative plate 610 and a base plate 630. And a variable winning device 650 for guiding a game ball flowing down between the two to the winning ports 26, 27, 28.

  In the base plate 8630 according to the eighth embodiment, a second connection hole 8632e penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed at an intermediate position between the two connection holes 632b. The second connection hole 8632e is formed so that the size of the opening is larger than the diameter of the game ball so that the game ball can pass through the inside.

  The path member 8640 is formed in a rectangular shape in front view and is formed in a substantially box shape in which the base plate 8630 side is opened. The path member 8640 is a member for forming a path that connects the left and right second through holes 631b and 633b formed in the base plate 8630 and the connection hole 632b or the second connection hole 8632e, and is formed on the left side in a front view. A first path 8641 connecting the second through hole 631b and the connection hole 632b on the left side of the base plate 630 or the second connection hole 8632e, and the second through hole 633b and the base plate 630 formed on the right side of the front view. And a second path 8642 that connects the connection hole 632b or the second connection hole 8632e on the right side of the front view.

  In addition, the path member 8640 has a path through which the game ball rolling on the first path 8641 is fed forward of the base plate 8630 in the middle of each of the first path 8641 and the second path 8642. A path switching member 8644 that switches to the connection hole 8632e is provided.

  The path switching member 8644 is housed inside a box-shaped housing portion 8443 that is continuously formed on the lower surface side of the path member 8640 (see FIG. 112). In addition, the housing portion 8643 is formed in a shape in which the front side (base plate 8630 side) is open. Thereby, the player can visually recognize the switching of the route of the route switching member 8644 by forming the decorative plate 610 and the base plate 8630 from the amount of the transparent material. As a result, the rolling of the game ball can be easily noticed, and the player can be easily provided with interest.

  Next, the route switching member 8644 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. In addition, since each path switching member 8644 formed on the first path 8641 and the second path 8642 is formed symmetrically, only the left path switching member 8644 will be described, and the right path switching will be described. Description of the member 8644 is omitted.

  The path switching member 8644 has a variable plate 8644a disposed on the same plane as the bottom surface (the surface on which the game ball rolls) of the first path 8641, one end disposed below the variable plate 8644a, and a central portion. It mainly includes a transmission member 8644b that is rotatably supported by the housing portion 8463, and a regulating member 8644c that is disposed at an upper portion of the other end of the transmission member 8644b and whose center portion is pivotally supported by the housing portion 8634. Formed.

  The variable plate 8644a is formed from a plate member that is formed in a rectangular shape in a top view and has a certain plate thickness. Further, the upper surface of the variable plate 8644a forms a part of the bottom surface of the first path 8641 (arranged on the same plane as the bottom surface of the path member 8640). In other words, the variable plate 8644a is arranged in a posture in which the variable plate 8644a is inclined downward from the laterally outer side of the path member 8640 toward the center side in the lateral direction, similarly to the bottom surface of the path member 8640. Thereby, the game ball sent to the 1st path | route 8641 can be flowed down.

  The variable plate 8644a is mainly provided with a through hole 8644a2 penetrating in the front-rear direction on one end side, and an abutting plate 8644a1 protruding in an arc shape from the lower surface on the other end side.

  The through-hole 8644a2 is inserted with a cylindrical rod member (not shown). Therefore, the stick member is attached to the housing portion 8463, so that the variable plate 8644a can be pivotally supported on the path member 8640 in a rotatable state. Further, an urging spring (not shown) is disposed between the variable plate 8644a and the accommodating portion 8443, and the upper surface of the variable plate 8644a is flush with the bottom surface of the path member 8640 in a normal state. Placed in position.

  The transmission member 8644b is formed in a prismatic shape, one end side is disposed in contact with the contact plate 8644a1 of the variable plate 8644a, and the other end side is disposed in contact with the bottom surface on the other end side of the regulating member 8644c described later. The

  In addition, the transmission member 8644b is disposed in the housing portion 8643 so as to be rotatable about the center position, and can be displaced by the displacement of the variable plate 8644a.

  The restricting member 8644c is formed in a prismatic shape extending to one side, and includes a first protrusion 8644c1 and a second protrusion 8644c2 that protrude upward from the upper surfaces of the one end side and the other end side. . Further, the restricting member 8644c is disposed in the housing portion 8443 so as to be rotatable at an intermediate position thereof. Thereby, the restriction member 8644c can displace the positions of the first protrusion 8644c1 and the second protrusion 8644c2 by being displaced.

  The first protrusion 8644c1 is disposed so as to be able to pass through the inside of a through hole formed so as to penetrate the first path 8641 of the path member 8640 in the direction of gravity. Further, the first protrusion 8644c1 is arranged at the tip thereof higher than the first path 8641 by a biasing spring (not shown) in a normal state (a state in which the variable plate 8644a is in a state before being displaced (the same as the first path 8641)). Is done.

  Further, the protruding position of the first protrusion 8641c1 is a position that overlaps with the side surface of the connecting hole 632b on the downstream side (center portion of the path member 860) side of the first path 8641 in the front-rear direction, and the front-rear direction of the first path 8641 The center position. As a result, the game ball rolling on the first path 8641 can be brought into contact with the first protrusion 8641c1, inserted through the connection hole 632b, and sent to the front of the base plate 8630.

  The distance between the tip surface of the first protrusion 8644c1 and the inner peripheral surface of the path member 8640 facing the first protrusion 8644c1 is set smaller than the outer diameter of the game ball, and the game ball flowing down the first path 8641 Overcoming one protrusion 8644c1 is prevented.

  The second protrusion 8644c2 is disposed so as to be able to pass through the inner peripheral surface of the cutout portion formed in the first path 8641 of the path member 8640. Further, the second protrusion 8644c2 is arranged with the tip thereof being flush with the first path 8641 in a normal state (a state in which the variable plate 8644a is in a state before being displaced (ie, flush with the first path 8641)). Therefore, in a normal state, it can suppress that the game ball rolling on the 1st path | route 8641 is inhibited by the 2nd protrusion 8644c2.

  On the other hand, when the restricting member 8644c is displaced and the second protrusion 8644c2 is disposed above the first path 8641, the tip surface of the second protrusion 8644c2 is disposed flush with the first path 8641.

  Thereby, the game ball rolling on the first path 8641 can flow downward without being regulated by the second protrusion 8644c2, passes through the second connection hole 8632e, and is sent to the front of the base plate 8630.

  In this case, the projecting position of the second protrusion 8644c2 is set on the back side of the connecting hole 632b, and the front-rear direction position is set on the end portion on the connecting hole 632b side. Thereby, the distance dimension between one end of the connection hole and the second protrusion 8644c2 is made smaller than the outer diameter of the game ball, and the game ball rolling on the first path 8641 passes through the connection hole 632b. Can be suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 114, the flow of the game ball when one game ball is sent to the first path 8641 will be described. FIG. 114A is a front view of the path member 8640, and FIG. 114B is a cross-sectional view of the path member 8640.

  In FIG. 114, the accommodating portion 8443 formed in the path member 8640 is omitted. In FIG. 114, the connecting hole 632b and the second connecting hole 8632e of the base plate 630 disposed on the front side of the path member 8640 are illustrated by two-dot chain lines. Further, the cross-sectional view of FIG. 114 (b) corresponds to the cross-sectional view of FIG. 112 (b).

  As shown in FIG. 114, when one game ball is sent from the through hole 631b (see FIG. 112) to the path member 8640, the game ball rolls due to the inclination of the first path 8641 and moves toward the connection hole 632b. Rolled.

  The rolling game ball rolls on the upper portion of the variable plate 8644a from the first path 8641, rolls toward the connection hole 632b, and contacts the first protrusion 8644c1 protruding to the back side of the connection hole 632b. The ball is sent to the connecting hole 632b side. That is, when one game ball is sent in the first path 8641, the game ball can be sent to the front of the base plate 8630 through the connection hole 632 b.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 115 and FIG. 116, a description will be given of a case where two game balls are continuously flown down on the first path 8641. 115A and 116A are front views of the path member 8640, and FIGS. 115B and 116B are cross-sectional views of the path member 8640.

  In FIGS. 115 and 116, the accommodating portion 8443 formed in the path member 8640 is omitted. In FIG. 115, the connecting hole 632b and the second connecting hole 8632e of the base plate 630 disposed on the front side of the path member 8640 are illustrated by two-dot chain lines. Further, the cross-sectional views of FIGS. 115B and 116B correspond to the cross-sectional view of FIG. 112B.

  As shown in FIG. 115, when two game balls are continuously sent from the through-hole 631b (see FIG. 112) to the path member 8640, the game balls roll due to the inclination of the first path 8641 and are connected to the connection hole. Rolled to the 632b side.

  The rolling game ball rolls on the upper portion of the variable plate 8644a from the first path 8641. At this time, the gravity of the rolling game ball is made larger than the biasing force of the biasing spring attached to the variable plate 8644a. As a result, the variable plate 8644a can be displaced when two game balls ride on the variable plate 8644a.

  When the variable plate 8644a is displaced, the contact plate 8644a1 formed on the variable plate 8644a is displaced downward in accordance with the displacement of the variable plate 8644a. Accordingly, one end of the transmission member 8644b that is in contact with the tip of the contact plate 8644a1 is displaced downward, and the transmission member 8644b is rotated. Due to the rotational displacement of the transmission member 8644b, the other side of the transmission member 8644b is displaced upward, and one side of the regulating member 8644c disposed above the other side of the transmission member 8644b is displaced upward. As a result, the first protrusion 8644c1 of the regulating member 8644c is displaced downward, and the second protrusion 8644c2 is displaced upward.

  In a state where the second protrusion 8644c2 protrudes upward, as described above, the game ball rolls on the first path 8641 and can roll to the back side of the second connection hole 8632e. Therefore, of the two game balls, the preceding game ball can be sent to the front side of the base plate 8630 from the second connection hole 8632e.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 116, when the preceding game ball gets on the first path 8641 closer to the connecting hole 632b than the variable plate 8644a from the upper part of the variable plate 8644a, the biasing force attached to the variable plate 8644a. The biasing force of the spring becomes greater than the gravity of the game ball, the state where the second protrusion 8644c2 is positioned upward is released, and the first protrusion 8644c1 is displaced upward.

  In this case, since the preceding game ball rolls to the position on the second connection hole 8632e side with respect to the first protrusion 8644c1, the second connection hole 8632e is passed through the front of the base plate 8630 as described above. Can be sent to.

  On the other hand, the following game ball is positioned on the upper portion of the variable plate 8644a, so that it comes into contact with the first protrusion 8644c1 and is sent to the connecting hole 632b side. That is, the following game ball passes through the connection hole 632b and is sent to the front of the base plate 8630.

  As described above, the guide means for guiding the game ball is connected to the variable plate 8644a on which the game ball passing through the path member 8640 rolls, and to the variable plate 8644a so as to be interlocked with the first position (FIG. 113 ( a restriction member 8644c that is formed so as to be displaceable between a position shown in FIG. 115A and a second position (position shown in FIG. 115A) and that changes the course of a game ball that passes through the route member 8640. The path of the game ball in a state where the member 8644c is displaced to the second position is a path that is easier to enter the through hole 632a than the path of the game ball in the state of being displaced to the first position, and the variable plate 8644a. When the first number of game balls roll, the restricting member 8644c is displaced to the second position, and the variable plate 8644a is less than the first number (two balls in the present embodiment). Number of 2 (in this embodiment , When the game ball of 1 ball) rolls, since the regulating member 8644c is displaced to the first position, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  That is, it is easier to enter the through-hole 632a when the first number of game balls, which is larger than the second number, flows down than when the second number of game balls flow down. (Easy to enter the through hole 632a can be changed depending on the number of game balls passing through the path member 8640), so that the entrance to the first entrance (left and right start winning entrances 26, 27) The number of game balls that have leaked can be focused on the player. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Further, since the regulating member 8644c is disposed on the downstream side of the variable plate 8644a, the direction of the predetermined game ball (the course) is related to the number of game balls that follow the predetermined game ball and the degree of connection. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved. That is, when the following game balls are connected (that is, when three or more game balls are connected in this embodiment), the number of game balls rolling on the variable plate 8644a is the first. While the number is maintained, the restricting member 8644c is maintained at the second position so that each game ball that reaches the restricting member 8644c can easily enter the through hole 632a, while the following game balls are connected in series. When the number of game balls that are divided and roll on the variable plate 8644a becomes equal to or smaller than the second number, the restricting member 8644c is displaced to the first position, and the game balls that have reached the restricting member 8644c are described above. In this case, it is more difficult to enter the through hole 632a than when the restricting member 8644c is displaced to the second position. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the number of game balls to be followed and how they are connected. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 117 to 122, a winning opening unit 9600 according to the ninth embodiment will be described. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the possibility that a game ball is won in the through hole 632a is reduced in a state where the variable plate 652 of the variable winning device 650 is positioned rearward. However, in the ninth embodiment, the variable winning device 650 is variable. Even in the state where the variable plate 652 of the winning device 650 is located rearward, when a plurality of hitting balls are fed through the path member 9640, it is easy to win the through hole 632a.

  FIG. 117 is a front view of a winning opening unit 9600 according to the ninth embodiment, and FIG. 118 is an exploded perspective front view of the winning opening unit 9600. In FIG. 117, the decorative plate 610 is not shown, and the outline of the path member 9640 disposed on the back side is shown by a chain line.

  As shown in FIGS. 117 and 118, a winning opening unit 9600 according to the ninth embodiment is disposed so as to face the decorative board 610 having a plurality of winning openings 26, 27, 28, and the decorative board 610. A base plate 9630 that forms a flow path for game balls, a path member 9640 that forms a game ball feed path between the base plate 9630, a base plate 9630, a decorative plate 610, and a base plate 9630 And a variable winning device 650 for guiding a game ball flowing down between the two to the through hole 632a.

  In the base plate 9630 according to the ninth embodiment, a second connection hole 8632e penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed at an intermediate position between the two connection holes 632b. The second connection hole 8632e is disposed below the connection hole 632b.

  The path member 9640 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has a substantially box shape with the base plate 8630 side opened. The path member 8640 is a member for forming a path that connects the second through holes 631b and 633b formed in the base plate 8630 and the connection hole 632b or the second connection hole 8632e.

  The path member 9640 is formed on the left side when viewed from the front, and is formed below the first path 9641 with a first path 9641 that connects the second through hole 631b and the connection hole 632b on the left side when viewed from the front of the base plate 9630, A third path 9645 that connects the first path 9641 and the second connection hole 8632e, and a second path that is formed on the right side in front view and connects the second through hole 633b and the connection hole 632b on the right side of the base plate 9630 in front view. 9642 and a fourth path 9646 that is formed below the second path 9642 and connects the second path 9642 and the second connection hole 8632e.

  In addition, the path member 9640 has a third path or 9645 as a rolling path of a game ball that rolls on the first path 9641 or the second path 9642 in the middle of each of the first path 9641 and the second path 9642. A path switching member 9644 that switches to the path 9646 is provided.

  Next, the path member 9640 will be described with reference to FIG. 119 (a) and 119 (b) are front views of the path member 9640. FIG. In FIG. 119, the second through holes 631b and 633b, the connecting hole 632b, and the second connecting hole 8632e of the base plate 9630 disposed in front of the path member 9640 are illustrated by two-dot chain lines.

  As shown in FIG. 119, the path switching member 9644 disposed in the path member 9640 is composed of a variable plate 9644a formed of a plate-like body. The variable plate 9644a is disposed (axially supported) on the path member 9640 in a state where one end side (the end side in the rolling direction of the game ball (the connection hole 632b side)) is rotatable, and between the path member 9640. A biasing spring (not shown) is disposed, and the other end is biased upward.

  Further, the variable plate 9644a is disposed in a state where the upper surface thereof is located on the same plane as the rolling surface of the first path 9641 or the second path 9642 (see FIG. 119 (a)). Further, when a force larger than the biasing force of the biasing spring is applied from the game ball rolling on the upper surface, the variable plate 944a is rotated and the other end side is inclined downward to the third path 9645 or the fourth path 9646. (See FIG. 119 (b)).

  Next, a case where one game ball is sent to the path member 9640 will be described with reference to FIG. 120 (a) and 120 (b) are front views of the path member 9640. FIG. In FIG. 120, the second through holes 631b and 633b, the connection hole 632b, and the second connection hole 8632e of the base plate 9630 disposed in front of the path member 9640 are illustrated by two-dot chain lines. 120 (a) and 120 (b), the transition state when the game ball rolls inside the path member 9640 is illustrated in order.

  Furthermore, in the following, since the rolling of the game balls sent from the second through holes 631b and 633b is only in the opposite rolling direction, only the gaming balls rolling on the left side will be described, and the right side will be described. A description of the rolling game ball is omitted.

  120 (a) and 120 (b), when the number of game balls sent from the second through hole 631b to the inside of the path member 9640 is one, the first path 9641 and the variable plate 9644a And is sent to the connecting hole 632b. That is, when one game ball is sent to the path member 9640, the game ball can be sent to the front side of the base plate 9630 through the connection hole 632 b.

  Next, a case where two game balls are sent to the path member 9640 will be described with reference to FIGS. 121 and 122. 121 (a) and 121 (b) are front views of the prize opening unit 9600, and FIGS. 122 (a) and 122 (b) are front views of the prize opening unit 9600. FIG. 121 and 122, the second through holes 631b and 633b, the connection hole 632b, and the second connection hole 8632e of the base plate 9630 disposed in front of the path member 9640 are illustrated by two-dot chain lines. . 121 to 122, transition states when the game ball rolls inside the path member 9640 are sequentially illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 122 (a) and 122 (b), when two or more game balls are sent from the second through hole 631b to the inside of the path member 9640, two game balls are When rolling from one path 9641 to the upper surface of the variable plate 9644a, the other end side of the variable plate 9644a is rotationally displaced downward.

  That is, the urging force for urging the variable plate 9644a is set to be larger than the load that one game ball acts on the upper surface of the variable plate 9644a, and is smaller than the load that the two game balls act on the upper surface. Is set. Thus, the variable plate 9644a can be displaced only when two game balls roll on the upper surface of the variable plate 9644a.

  When the variable plate 9644a is displaced, the other end side of the variable plate 9644a is displaced to the upper surface of the third path 9645 as described above, and the game ball can be sent to the third path 9645.

  As shown in FIG. 122 (a), when two game balls are sent to the third path 9645, there is no load applied to the upper surface of the variable plate 9644a, so that the variable plate 9644a is displaced by the urging force and the other end. The side is displaced upward (to the position before the game ball is sent).

  Thereby, as shown in FIG. 122 (b), the game ball sent to the third path 9645 can be sent to the second connecting hole 8632 side. As a result, the two game balls roll on the third path 9645 and are sent to the front side of the base plate 9630 from the second connection hole 8632.

  That is, when two game balls are sent to the path member 9640 in succession, both of the two balls can pass through the second connection hole 8632 and be sent to the front side of the base plate 9630.

  Therefore, in the ninth embodiment, when two or more game balls flowing down in the vicinity of the left start winning opening 26 are not won, the possibility of winning both balls can be given. As a result, it is easy to give interest to the player.

  Next, the route switching member 10670 in the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 123 to 130. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In the ninth embodiment, the case where the switching between the first path 9641 and the third path 9645 is performed by the load of the game ball has been described, but in the tenth embodiment, the second path 10642, the third path 10443, A case where the path switching is performed by the displacement and magnetic force of the path switching member 10670 will be described.

  First, the configuration of the path switching member 10670 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 123A is a top view of the path switching member 10670 according to the tenth embodiment, FIG. 123B is a front view of the path switching member 10670, and FIG. 123C is a path switching member 10670. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 123, the path switching member 10670 is formed mainly including a base member 10671 formed in a columnar shape and a plurality of magnets 10672 disposed in the base member 10671.

  The base member 10671 is mainly provided with a lower base member 10671b which is disposed on the lower side in the gravitational direction and has a recessed inside, and an upper base member 10671a which is disposed on an upper portion of the lower base member 10671b. It is formed.

  The lower base member 10671b has a groove 10671b1 that is recessed radially inward on the outer peripheral surface thereof, a recess 10671b2 that is recessed in the axial direction from the upper surface inside the groove 10671b1, and a through-hole formed in the shaft center. The through hole 10671b3 is mainly provided.

  The groove portions 10671b1 are formed at a plurality of locations (four locations in the present embodiment) at equal intervals in the circumferential direction on the outer peripheral surface of the lower base member 10671b. The groove portion 10671b1 is a surface that attracts a game ball to the inner surface by the magnetic force of a magnet 10672 described later, and is recessed with a width smaller than the outer shape of the game ball.

  The recess 10671b2 is a hole that accommodates a magnet 10672, which will be described later, and is recessed in a shape larger than the outer shape of the magnet 10672. Thereby, the magnet 10672 can be accommodated inside.

  The through hole 10671b3 is a hole into which a shaft of a drive motor (not shown) is fitted together with a magnet 10672 described later. By connecting (internally fitting) the shaft of the driving motor to the through hole 10671b3, the path switching member 10670 can be rotated by the driving force of the driving motor.

  The upper base member 10671a is formed to have an outer diameter substantially the same as the outer diameter of the lower base member 10671b, and is disposed so as to cover the upper portion of the lower base member 10671b, so that the magnet 10672 accommodated in the recess 10671b2 comes out. Can be prevented.

  Further, a through hole 10671a1 is formed through the shaft center of the upper base member 10671a. Since the shaft of the drive motor is fitted into the through hole 10671a1 and the through hole 10671b3, the rotation of the path switching member 10670 can be stabilized.

  The magnet 10672 can be made to act on the outer peripheral surface of the groove 10671b1 by being accommodated in the recess 10671b2 formed inside the groove 10671b1. Thereby, a game ball can be adsorb | sucked to the outer peripheral surface of the path | route switching member 10670 (groove part 10671b1).

  Next, a route where the route switching member 10670 is arranged will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 124A is a top view of the path switching member 10670 and the paths 10661, 10642, and 10645. FIG. FIG. 124 (b) is a side view of the path switching member 10670 and the paths 10661, 10642, and 10645 as viewed in the direction of arrow CXXIVb in FIG. 124 (a). 124C is a side view of the path switching member 10670 and the paths 10661, 10642, and 10645 as viewed in the direction of the arrow CXXIVc in FIG. 124A. FIG. 124 (d) is a side view of the path switching member 10670 and the paths 10661, 10642, 10645 as viewed in the direction of arrow CXXIVd in FIG. 124 (a).

  In FIGS. 124 (a) to 124 (d), the paths 10641, 10642, and 10645 are schematically illustrated. In FIG. 124 (d), the second path 10642 and the third path 10645 are illustrated by chain lines.

  As shown in FIGS. 124A to 124D, the first path 10661 is formed to be curved along the outer peripheral surface of the path switching member 10670. Further, the first path 10661 is formed such that the bottom surface is positioned approximately the radius of the game ball from the center position in the vertical direction (FIG. 123 (b) vertical direction) of the groove 10671b1. The bottom surface of the first path 10661 is formed to be inclined toward the path switching member 10670 side, and a wall portion is formed to be erected on the upper side in the gravity direction from both ends in the rolling direction. Thereby, the game ball sent to the first path 10661 can be rolled to the path switching member 10670 side.

  Further, the wall portion standing on the first path 10661 is not formed at a position along the outer peripheral surface of the path switching member 10670. Thereby, the game ball rolling on the first path 10661 can be adsorbed to the inner surface of the groove portion 10661a1 formed on the outer peripheral surface of the path switching member 10670.

  Note that the upstream side of the first path 10661 is connected to the back side of the second through holes 631b and 633b formed through the base plate 630 of the winning opening unit 600. Therefore, the game ball sent to the inside of the second through holes 631b and 633b can be guided to the route switching member 10670 by rolling the first route 10661.

  The second path 10642 is arranged such that the start end side of the second path 10642 is spaced apart from the end side of the first path 10661 in the circumferential direction of the path switching member 10670 and along the outer peripheral surface of the path switching member 10670. It is formed. The second path 10642 and the first path 10661 are formed at the same position in the axial direction of the path switching member 10670.

  Note that the second path 10642 may be formed at a position higher than the first path 10642. In this case, the following game ball is attracted to the preceding game ball and is suspended from the preceding game ball as described later. When this occurs, it is possible to make it difficult to apply the load of the subsequent game ball on the suction surface.

  The third path 10645 is formed on the lower side of the second path 10642 in the direction of gravity (lower side in FIG. 124 (d)). The starting end side of the third path 10645 is formed so as to extend in the circumferential direction of the path switching member 10670 from the second path 10642. That is, the start end side of the third path 10645 is closer to the end side of the first path 10661 than the start end side of the second path 10642.

  The downstream side (termination side) of the second path 10642 is connected to the back side of the connection hole 632b, and the downstream side (termination side) of the third path is connected to the second connection hole 8632e. That is, it is possible to increase the possibility that the game ball sent to the third path 10645 wins the through hole 632a more than the second path 10642.

  Further, the path switching member 10670 is connected to the drive motor as described above, and is rotationally displaced by the drive of the drive motor. The direction of rotation of the path switching member 10670 is rotated counterclockwise in a top view (viewed in the direction of FIG. 124 (a)).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 125 and FIG. 126, a case where one game ball is sent to the first path 10661 will be described. 125A is a top view of the path switching member 10670 and the paths 10661, 10642, and 10645, and FIG. 125B is a side view of the path switching member 10670 and the paths 10661, 10642, and 10645. 126A is a top view of the path switching member 10670 and the paths 10661, 10642, and 10645, and FIG. 126B is a side view of the path switching member 10670 and the paths 10661, 10642, and 10645.

  125 (b) corresponds to FIG. 124 (b), and FIG. 126 (b) corresponds to FIG. 124 (d).

  As shown in FIGS. 125 and 126, when a game ball is sent to the first path 10642, the game ball rolls along the first path 10661 and rolls along the outer peripheral surface of the path switching member 10670. The In this case, as described above, the path switching member 10670 has the groove 10671b1 formed on the outer peripheral surface thereof, and the game ball can be attracted to the outer peripheral surface by the magnet 10672 disposed therein. The game ball rolling on the first path 10661 can be adsorbed to the inner surface of the groove 10671b1.

  As described above, since the path switching member 10670 is rotationally displaced by the drive motor, the game ball is sent to the second path 10642 by rotating the path switching member 10670 while the game ball is attracted to the groove 10671b1. can do.

  Note that the game ball carried to the second path 10642 while being adsorbed by the groove part 10671b1 is dropped from the groove part 10671b1 by coming into contact with a standing wall formed on the side surface of the second path 10642.

  As described above, when one game ball rolls on the first path 10661, the game ball can be sent to the second path 10642.

  If the game ball rolling on the first path 10661 is not attracted to the groove 10671b1, the game ball is formed in a gap formed between the terminal end side of the first path 10661 and the start end side of the second path 10642. Is sent to a predetermined collection path.

  Next, a case where two game balls are continuously sent (dropped) on the first path 10661 will be described with reference to FIGS. 127 to 130. 127 (a), 128 (a), 129 (a), and 130 (a) are top views of the path switching member 10670 and the paths 10661, 10642, and 10645, and FIG. 127 (b) and FIG. 128 (b), FIG. 129 (b), and FIG. 130 (b) are side views of the path switching member 10670 and the paths 10641, 10642, and 10645.

  127 (b) is FIG. 124 (b), FIG. 128 (b) is FIG. 124 (c), FIG. 129 (b) is FIG. 124 (c), and FIG. 130 (b) is FIG. c) and corresponding to each. In addition, FIGS. 127 to 130 illustrate the transition states in which two game balls are sent in order.

  First, as shown in FIGS. 127 (a) and 127 (b), when two game balls are continuously sent to the first path 10661, the preceding game ball is moved to the groove portion of the path switching member 10670. Adsorbed to the inner surface of 10671b1. As a result, the attracted game ball (preceding game ball) is magnetized, and the subsequent game ball is attracted to the outer peripheral surface of the preceding game ball.

  As shown in FIGS. 128 (a) and 128 (b), the path switching member 10670 rotates while the preceding game ball is adsorbed inside the groove 10671b1, and the preceding game ball moves to the first path 10661 and When positioned in the gap of the second path 10642, the following game ball is suspended (suspended) below the preceding game ball.

  As shown in FIG. 129 (a) and FIG. 130 (b), when the path switching member 10670 is further rotated in a state in which the following game ball is suspended below the preceding game ball, the preceding game ball is advanced. A tip 10642a formed on the first path 10642 side of the plate forming the bottom surface of the second path 10642 is inserted between the game ball and the following game ball.

  The front end portion 10642a is formed in a tapered flat plate shape, and a game ball (preceding game ball) attracted to the lower surface of the path switching member 10670, and a game ball (rear) that is attracted to the game ball and suspended downward. The game ball preceding the lower surface of the path switching member 10670 is adsorbed and its position is arranged at a height position where the tip is inserted at the adsorption position between the game ball and the game ball. If the following game balls are adsorbed by the preceding game balls, the adsorption of these game balls is released smoothly, and only the following game balls (game balls suspended below) are removed. Easy to drop off.

  Thereby, as shown in FIGS. 130 (a) and 130 (b), the following game ball is dropped from the outer peripheral surface of the preceding game ball. Therefore, the preceding game ball can be sent to the first path 10642 and the following game ball can be sent to the second path 10642. That is, when game balls are continuously sent to the first path 10661, one ball can be sent to an advantageous path. As a result, interest can be given to the player.

  As described above, the guide means for guiding the game ball includes a path switching member 10670 formed to be rotatable, and a magnet disposed on the path switching member 10670 and attracting the game ball to the outer surface of the path switching member 10670 in a suspended state. 10672 and a ball that is attracted to the outer surface of the path switching member 10670 by the magnet 10672 and positioned on the trajectory associated with the rotation of the path switching member 10670, the game ball comes into contact with the game ball and falls off the path switching member 10670. A distal end portion 10642a that is positioned below the first (preceding) game ball attracted to the outer surface of the path switching member 10670 in the gravitational direction and on the outer surface of the path switching member 10670. More than the game ball that is attracted and sent, it is dropped from the path switching member 10670 by the contact of the tip 10642a. Who game balls were found because the game ball is likely to ball entrance into the through-hole 632a, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  That is, one (or two or more) game balls are further attracted to the game balls attracted to the outer surface of the path switching member 10670 than when only one game ball is attracted to the outer surface of the path switching member 10670. Since it is easier to enter the through hole 632a (the ease of entering the through hole 632a can be changed depending on the number of game balls passing through the passage member), the left and right start winning openings 26, The player can also pay attention to the number of game balls that have leaked into 27. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In particular, in the tenth embodiment, even when a plurality of game balls are rolled toward the path switching member 10670, if the game balls are connected, the game ball preceding the path switching member 10670 is displayed. When it is adsorbed and the adjoining game ball can be adsorbed easily, and at least the adjoining game ball can easily enter the through hole 632a, while the game balls are separated from each other by a predetermined interval. , The game ball preceding the path switching member 10670 can be adsorbed, but the following game ball cannot be adsorbed by the preceding game ball, and the subsequent game ball is also connected to the path switching member 10670 (the preceding game ball and Is attracted to another magnet 10672). That is, it is difficult for both the preceding and following to enter the through hole 632a. Therefore, not only the number of game balls but also the state of the connection can be focused on the player. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Further, according to the tenth embodiment, the game ball is attracted to the outer surface of the path switching member 10670 in a suspended state, and the game ball is sent with the rotation of the path switching member 10670 in the suspended state. Due to variations in the rolling speed, rolling direction, suction position, and the like, a form in which the game ball drops off from the path switching member 10670 can be formed as an unstable state of swinging and swinging. That is, even when only one game ball is attracted to the path switching member 10670 (when the game ball is not in contact with the distal end portion 10642a), the game ball is dropped and easily enters the through hole 632a. Production can be performed.

  Furthermore, when only one game ball is adsorbed to the path switching member 10670, it is possible to suppress the tip 10642a from acting on the game ball and to easily maintain the adsorption of the game ball. That is, even if the adsorbent on the outer surface of the path switching member 10670 of the game ball is unstable, when the game ball is sent to the entrance of the second path 10642, the third path 10463 is not hindered. Two paths 10642 can be entered.

  Accordingly, when only one game ball is attracted and suspended (suspended) by the path switching member 10670, and when two or more game balls are attracted by the path switching member 10670 and continuously suspended. The difference in ease of entering the ball into the through hole 632a can be made clearer. Thereby, it is possible to make the player pay more attention to the number of game balls and their series. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 131 to FIG. 137, the variable winning device 11650 in the eleventh embodiment will be described. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the connection hole 632b and the insertion hole 632c are formed apart from each other has been described. However, in the eleventh embodiment, the connection hole 11632b and the insertion hole 11632c are connected and formed.

  First, with reference to FIG. 131 to FIG. 133, the configuration of the winning opening unit 11600 in the eleventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 131 is a front view of a winning opening unit 11600 according to the eleventh embodiment. FIG. 132 is an exploded perspective front view of the winning opening unit 11600. FIG. 133 is an exploded perspective rear view of the winning opening unit 11600. In FIG. 131, the decorative plate 610 is not shown, and the outer shape of the path member 11640 is shown by a chain line.

  As shown in FIGS. 131 to 133, a winning opening unit 11600 according to the eleventh embodiment is disposed so as to face the decorative board 610 having a plurality of winning openings 26, 27, 28, and the decorative board 610. A base plate 11630 that forms a flow path for game balls at the same time, a path member 11640 that forms a pitch path for game balls between the base plate 11630 and the base plate 11630, and a decorative plate 610 and a base plate 11630. And a variable winning device 11650 for guiding a game ball flowing down between the two to the through hole 632a.

  The central recess 632 of the base plate 11630 includes a through-hole 632a formed through substantially the center in the left-right direction of the base plate 630, two through-holes 11632c formed through both sides of the through-hole 632a, and the through-hole 11632c. And a connection hole 11632b formed continuously above the main body.

  The insertion hole 11632c is an opening into which a variable plate 11652 of the variable prize winning device 11650 described later is inserted, and is formed in a horizontally long rectangle when viewed from the front, and is inclined downward toward the through hole 632a.

  The connection hole 11632b is an opening through which a game ball sent through the path member 11640, which will be described later, is discharged to the front side of the base plate 11630, and is continuous from the upper part outside the insertion hole 11632c (side away from the through hole 632a). And formed through.

  The path member 11640 is formed in a rectangular shape in front view and is formed in a substantially box shape with the base plate 630 side opened. The path member 11640 is a member for forming a path that connects the second through holes 631b and 633b and the connection hole 11632b, and is formed on the left side of the front view and is formed on the left side of the second through hole 631b and the base plate 630. The first passage 11642 is connected to the connection hole 11632b, and the second passage 11642 is formed on the right side in the front view and connects the second through hole 633b and the connection hole 11632b on the right side in the front view of the base plate 11630. The

  In addition, a recessed portion 11647 that is cut out in the vertical direction is formed on the bottom surface of the first route 11641 and the second route 11642 on the center side in the left-right direction. Inside the recess 11647, a variable plate 11652 of the variable winning device 11650 is disposed. Thereby, the game balls rolling on the first path 11641 and the second path 11642 can be sent to the upper part of the variable plate 11652 before passing through the connection hole 11632b.

  The variable plate 11652 of the variable prize-winning device 11650 is formed with a plurality of concave portions 11652a extending in the left-right direction on the top surface on the front end side thereof in the front-rear direction. The recess 11652a is formed in a straight line, and extends in different directions on the side far from the through hole 632a and the side near the through hole 632a. The concave portion 11652a on the side far from the through hole 632a is formed in parallel with the left-right direction. On the other hand, the concave portion 11652a formed on the side closer to the through hole 632a is formed so as to be inclined in a direction approaching the front side toward the through hole 632a.

  Next, the displacement of the variable winning device 11650 will be described with reference to FIG. 134 (a) and 134 (b) are cross-sectional views of the winning unit 11600 along the line CXXXIV-CXXXIV in FIG. 131. FIG. 134 (a) shows the variable winning device 11650 before displacement, and FIG. 134 (b) shows the variable winning device 11650 after displacement. 131, the decorative board 610 is not shown, but in FIG. 134, the decorative board 610 is shown.

  As shown in FIGS. 134 (a) and 134 (b), the variable plate 11652 of the variable winning device 11650 before displacement is disposed at a position where the concave portion 11652a is adjacent to the end portion of the first path 11641. On the other hand, the variable plate 11652 of the variable winning device 11650 after the displacement is disposed at a position where the concave portion 11652a protrudes to the front side of the base plate 11630.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 135 (a) and 135 (b), when the variable plate 11652 of the variable winning device 11650 is extended to the front side with the game ball riding on the variable plate 11652. Explain.

  135 (a) and 135 (b) are cross-sectional views of the winning opening unit 11600. FIG. Note that FIG. 135 (a) corresponds to FIG. 134 (a), and FIG. 135 (b) corresponds to FIG. 134 (b). In the following, only the rolling of the left and right game balls will be described, and the description on the right side will be omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 135 (a) and 135 (b), when a game ball is sent to the upper part of the variable plate 11652 in the retracted state on the back side, the variable plate 11652 is displaced in a state of protruding to the front side. Then, the game ball can be displaced forward with the displacement of the variable plate 11652.

  In this case, since the concave portion 11652a is formed on the upper surface of the variable plate 11652, the frictional force between the variable plate 11652 and the game ball can be increased, so that the game ball rotates when the variable plate 11652 is displaced. And it can suppress staying in the position. Therefore, the game ball can be displaced forward with the displacement of the variable plate 11652.

  As described above, since the game ball can be displaced to the front side (the front side of the base plate 11630) with the displacement of the variable plate 11652, it is easier to win the game ball in the through hole 632a than in the first embodiment. can do.

  That is, since the variable plate 11652 forms a bottom surface (rolling surface) that continues to the connection hole 632b of the path member 11640, the game ball can be played even if the variable plate 11652 is not projected (ie, immersed). It can be positioned on the variable plate 11652, and accordingly, the time for the game ball to be positioned on the variable plate 11652 can be secured. Therefore, the game ball that has passed through the path member 11640 can be easily entered into the through hole 632a, and the player can be more expected to enter the through hole 632a. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  The upper surface of the variable plate 11652 that forms the bottom surface of the path member 11640 is formed with a recess 11652a that guides the game ball located on the upper surface toward the through hole 632a. When the variable ball 11652 is projected from the state where the game ball is positioned on the upper surface of a certain variable plate 11652, the game ball can be projected while being guided toward the through hole 632a by the action of the concave portion 11652a. The game ball can easily enter the through hole 632a.

  Note that the recess 11652a is a ridge or groove (or a combination thereof) that extends in the direction of approaching the through hole 632a toward the front end of the variable plate 11652 in the protruding direction and that protrudes or is recessed on the upper surface. Is exemplified. The cross-sectional shape of the ridges and grooves is arbitrary, and examples thereof include a rectangular cross section, a polygonal cross section, and an arc-shaped cross section (or a cross section having a combination thereof).

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 136 (a) to 136 (c), a description will be given of a case where the variable plate 11652 of the variable winning device 11650 is retracted to the back side with a game ball on the variable plate 11652. do.

  136 (a) to 136 (c) are cross-sectional views of the winning opening unit 11600. FIG. 136 (a) corresponds to FIG. 134 (b), FIG. 136 (c) corresponds to FIG. 134 (a), and FIG. 136 (b) corresponds to FIGS. 136 (a) and 136 (c). An intermediate position is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 136 (a) to FIG. 136 (c), when the game ball is rolling on the inner side of the variable plate 11652, if the variable plate 11652 is displaced to the back side, The game ball can be displaced toward the through hole 632a by the inclined surface of the recess 11652a formed in the inner portion.

  Accordingly, the game ball can be displaced toward the through hole 632a in accordance with the displacement of the variable plate 11652, so that the game ball can easily win the through hole 632a.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 137, the time during which the game ball can receive an action from the variable plate 11652 when the variable plate 11652 is displaced will be described.

  FIG. 137 (a) is a time chart showing the time change of the displacement amount of the variable plate 11652, and FIG. 137 (b) is a time chart showing the time change of the displacement amount of the variable plate 652 in the first embodiment. .

  On the horizontal axis, “t0” is the time for the variable plate 11652 and the variable plate 652 to start sliding displacement from the immersive state in the protruding (predecessor to the front side) direction, and “t5” is immersive. The time for which the slide displacement in the direction of (reverse to the back side) is completed and the state is made immersive is shown. On the vertical axis, “open position” indicates that the variable plate 11652 and the variable plate 652 are slid to the maximum projecting position.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the variable plate 11652 forms a part of the rolling surface of the path member 11640. Therefore, when the variable plate 11652 starts sliding displacement in the protruding direction, If a game ball is present (if it is present), the game ball can receive an action from the variable plate 11652 (make it easier to enter the through hole 632a). That is, the action from the variable plate 11652 can be given to the game ball from time t0 in FIG. 137 (a). Note that the time t4 is a time that is shorter than the time t3.

  Further, as described above, since the plurality of concave portions 11652a are formed on the upper surface of the variable plate 11652, even if the variable plate 11652 is slid and displaced in the immersion direction, the upper surface of the variable plate 11652. If the game ball is present (if it is placed), the game ball can be acted on from the variable plate 11652 (recessed portion 11652a) (can easily enter the through hole 632a). That is, the action from the variable plate 11652 can be given to the game ball until time t3 in FIG.

  On the other hand, in the variable plate 652 in the first embodiment, when the variable plate 652 is immersed (retracted), the game ball receives an action from the variable plate 652 (it is easy to enter the through hole 632a). ) And after the amount of protrusion of the variable plate 652 reaches a predetermined amount (the amount of protrusion on which the game ball is placed on the upper surface), the variable plate 652 can receive an action. That is, the action from the variable plate 652 can be received only after the time t2 in FIG. 137 (b).

  Further, when the upper surface is formed as a closed smooth surface like the variable plate 652 in the first embodiment, when the variable plate 11652 is slid and displaced in the immersion direction, the upper surface of the variable plate 652 is Even if a game ball exists (is placed), the game ball cannot receive an action from the variable plate 652 (upper surface) (it is easy to enter the through hole 632a). In this case, the game ball rolls on the upper surface of the variable plate 652 to facilitate entering the through hole 632a. That is, the game ball can be given the action from the variable plate 652 only until the time t4 in FIG. 137 (b) because the rolling time needs to be secured.

  Thus, according to the present embodiment, the time during which the game ball can receive an action from the variable plate 11652 can be made longer than in the first embodiment (t4-t2 <t3-t0). As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the game ball to enter the through hole 632a.

  Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be guessed.

  In each of the above embodiments, a gaming machine may be configured by replacing or combining part or all of one embodiment with part or all of another one or more embodiments.

  In the first embodiment, the case has been described in which the radially inner surface of the groove portion 372Rc2 of the rotating body 372R is formed on a plane orthogonal to the radial direction. The surface may be inclined with respect to the direction orthogonal to the radial direction.

  In the first and third embodiments, the case has been described in which the outer shape of the magnet 372Rb is smaller than the groove portions 372Rc2 and 3372Rc2 of the second rotating bodies 372Rc and 3372Rc when viewed in the radial direction of the rotating bodies 372R and 3372R. The outer diameter of the magnet 372Rb may be formed larger than the groove portions 372Rc2 and 3372Rc2 of the second rotating bodies 372Rc and 3372Rc. In this case, since the range in which the game balls are attracted to the groove 372Rc2 can be increased, the game balls can be easily attracted to the outer peripheral surfaces of the rotating bodies 372R and 3372R.

  In the first to fourth embodiments, the case where the magnets 372Rb and 2372Rb are disposed inside the rotating bodies 372R, 2372R, 3372R, and 4372R has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto, and the magnets 372Rb and 2372Rb are not necessarily limited thereto. May be arranged at a position substantially coinciding with the outer peripheral surface of the rotator 372R, 2372R, 3372R, 4372R. That is, the magnets 372Rb and 2372Rb may be exposed.

  The outer peripheral surfaces of the magnets 372Rb and 2372Rb are preferably arranged to substantially coincide with the recessed tip surfaces of the groove portions 372Rc2, 2372Rc2 and 3372Rc of the second rotating bodies 372Rc, 2372Rc, 3372Rc and 4372Rc. In this case, by the rotation of the rotating bodies 372R, 2372R, 3372R, and 4372R, the game balls sent to the sixth pitching path KR6 can be directly attracted to the magnets 372Rb and 2372Rb and sent to the seventh pitching path KR7. Therefore, since the store clerk or player of the store can visually recognize the attracting surfaces of the magnets 372Rb and 2372Rb, if the magnet is damaged, the store clerk or player of the store can immediately recognize the failure of the pachinko machine 10. Can respond immediately.

  In the first to third embodiments, the rotating bodies 372R, 2372R, and 3372R have the sixth pitching path KR6 when the groove portions 372Rc2, 2372Rc2, and 3372c are disposed at positions adjacent to the sixth pitching path KR6. Although the case where a flowing game ball is adsorbed has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, in a state where the stopper portion 396 is displaced, the game ball flowing down the sixth pitching path may be stopped, and the stopped game ball may be attracted by rotating the rotating bodies 372R, 2372R, and 3372R. In this case, a case where the rotating body 372R, 2372R, 3372R and the game ball are attracted by the displacement of the stopper unit 396 can be formed, so that not only the rotation of the rotating body 372R, 2372R, 3372R but also the stopper unit 396 displacements can be shown. Thereby, since a player can visually recognize a plurality of pitching forms, the player can be provided with interest.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the variable winning device 650 in which the variable plate 652 slides in the front-rear direction is disposed in the winning opening unit 600 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto, and the variable plate 652 is not necessarily limited thereto. However, it may be rotationally displaced around one end. In this case, since it is easy to visually recognize the displacement of the variable plate 652 from the player side, the player can easily perform a game such as an operation of launching a game ball into the game area in accordance with the movement of the variable plate 652. Therefore, interest can be given to the player.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the variable plate 652 of the variable winning device 650 is disposed on the lower side of the path member 640 in the gravity direction has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the variable plate 652 of the variable winning device 650 may be formed to be a part of the lower end surface of the path member 640.

  That is, a part of the first path 641 and the second path 642 of the path member 640 may be formed to be the upper surface of the variable plate 652. In this case, when the variable plate 652 is slid and displaced while the game ball is on the upper surface, the game ball can be displaced forward in accordance with the slide displacement. Therefore, the game ball can be brought close to the through hole 632a in accordance with the slide displacement, so that the probability that the game ball wins (enters) the through hole 632a can be increased. When the variable plate 652 is slid, the upper surface of the variable plate 652 is preferably uneven to increase the frictional resistance so that the game ball on the upper surface does not slip.

  In the ninth embodiment, the case where the variable plate 9644a is inclined downward in the direction away from the second connection hole 8632 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the variable plate 96644a may be inclined downward toward the second connection hole 8632.

  In this case, the game balls sent to the third path 9645 and the fourth path 9646 can be smoothly sent to the second connection hole 8632. That is, the rolling direction of the game ball rolling on the variable plate 9644a can be set to the direction toward the second connecting hole 8632e.

  In addition, the tilting direction of the variable plate 9644a may be configured to incline downward toward the back side of the prize opening unit 9600, or may be configured to incline downward toward the front side of the prize opening unit 9600.

  In the fifth embodiment, when the release member 5372Rd disposed on the rotator 5372R is displaced, a part of the release member 5372Rd is displaced radially outward of the rotator 5372R, thereby rotating with the preceding game ball. Although the case where the adsorption | suction with the body 5372R is cancelled | released was demonstrated, it is not necessarily restricted to this.

  A description will be given with reference to FIG. 138 (a) is a side view of the rotator 13572R, FIG. 138 (b) is a top view of the rotator 13572R, and FIG. 138 (c) is a CXXXVIIIc-CXXXVIIIc line in FIG. 138 (b). It is sectional drawing of the rotary body 13572R, FIG.138 (d) is sectional drawing of the rotary body 13572R in the CXXXVIIId-CXXXVIIId line | wire of FIG.138 (b).

  As shown in FIG. 138, the release member 13572Rd is disposed on the rotating body 13572R in a state where the release member 13572Rd is rotatable about one end, and the magnet 372Rb is disposed on the release member 13572Rd.

  The release member 13572Rd is formed to extend to the inner peripheral portion of the groove 372Rc2 that is recessed in the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 13572R, and a part of the release member 13572Rd protrudes radially outward from the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 13572R. A pressing portion 5372Rd2.

  The magnet 372b is located on the inner side in the radial direction of the groove 372Rc2, and is attached to a portion extending to the inner peripheral portion of the groove 372Rc2 of the release member 13572Rd.

  Therefore, when the pressing portion 5372Rd2 is pressed by the following game ball, the magnet 372Rd can be displaced inward in the radial direction of the rotating body 13572R. As a result, since the magnetic force of the magnet 372Rb acting on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 13572R is weakened, the preceding game ball attracted to the rotating body 13572 can be dropped off.

  In the first embodiment, the case has been described in which the game ball is brought into contact with the bottom surface of the groove 372Rc2 in a state where the groove 372Rc2 is fitted with the recessed depth of the groove 372Rc2, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. . For example, the recessed depth of the groove portion 372Rc2 may be set to a dimension such that the game ball is not in contact with the bottom surface of the groove portion 372Rc2 in a state where the game ball is fitted in the groove portion 372Rc2. In this case, the inner edge of the groove 372Rc2 (the ridge line between the inner surface of the groove 372Rc2 and the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 372R) can be brought into contact with the game ball. Therefore, when the game ball is sent along with the rotation of the rotator 372R, it is possible to prevent the game ball from wobbling in the rotation direction of the rotator 372R, and as a result, it is possible to suppress the adsorption of the game ball from being released. .

  In particular, when a game ball is sent along with the rotation of the rotating body 372R, the vertical component of gravity acting on the game ball before and after the game ball (groove 372Rc2) passes through the uppermost position in the gravity direction. Since the direction is reversed, the game ball is likely to wobble in the rotation direction of the rotating body 372R due to the reverse reaction. In contrast, according to the present embodiment, the inner edge of the groove 372Rc2 (the ridge line between the inner surface of the groove 372Rc2 and the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 372R) can be brought into contact with the game ball, that is, the rotation direction of the rotating body 372R. Since the game ball can be sandwiched by the inner edge of the groove portion 372Rc2 from both sides, it is possible to prevent the game ball from wobbling in the rotating direction of the rotating body 372R, and as a result, it is possible to suppress the adsorption of the game ball from being released.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the plurality of LEDs 355a are respectively arranged on the back surfaces of the first irregular reflection portion 353d and the second irregular reflection portion 354b has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, one LED 355a may be arranged at a position straddling the first irregular reflection part 353d and the second irregular reflection part 354b. In this case, since the number of LEDs 355a can be reduced, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

  In the tenth embodiment, the case where two game balls are adsorbed (hanging down) on the outer surface of the path switching member 10670 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, three game balls may be attracted (drooped) to the outer surface of the path switching member 10670.

  In this case, by arranging the vertical position of the tip portion 10642a of the second path 10642 to be lower than the first path 10641 by the diameter of the game ball, the preceding two game balls are placed in the second path 10642. It is possible to send one game ball to the third route after the ball is sent. Also, by making the vertical position of the tip portion 10642a of the second path 10642 substantially the same as that of the first path 10642, one preceding game ball is sent to the second path 10642, and the following two balls A game ball can be sent to the third path 10443. That is, when a plurality of game balls are attracted (drooped) to the outer surface of the path switching member 10670, the number of balls sent to the second path 10642 can be arbitrarily set, and the degree of freedom in design can be increased.

  In the tenth embodiment, a case has been described in which when two game balls are attracted (hanging down) to the outer surface of the path switching member 10670, the tip 10642a is inserted between the game balls and divided. It is not limited. For example, the abutting member that abuts on the outer surface of the following game ball depending on the preceding game ball may be brought into contact with the preceding game ball to drop the following game ball.

  In addition, as a shape for dropping the following game ball together with the preceding game ball, the lower end side of the groove 10671b1 formed in the path switching member 10670 is connected to the lower surface side of the lower base member 10671b (path switching member 10670). Thus, it is preferable to eliminate the step between the lower surface of the groove 10671b1 and the outer peripheral surface of the path switching member 10670. By connecting the lower end side of the groove portion 10671b1 formed in the path switching member 10670 to the lower surface side of the lower base member 10671b (path switching member 10670), it follows the preceding game ball adsorbed on the outer surface of the path switching member 10670. When the game ball is attracted (hangs down), the preceding game ball does not come into contact with the lower end surface of the groove 10671b1, so that the preceding game ball can be easily displaced downward. Therefore, the game ball that follows along with the preceding game ball can be dropped from the outer surface of the path switching member 10670.

  Further, the groove portion 10671b1 may be formed on the same peripheral surface as the outer peripheral surface of the lower base member 10671b (path switching member 10670). In this case, when the following game ball is attracted (hanging down) to the preceding game ball attracted to the outer surface of the path switching member 10670, the preceding game ball will not come into contact with the lower end surface of the groove 10671b1, The game ball to be played can be easily displaced downward. Therefore, the game ball that follows along with the preceding game ball can be dropped from the outer surface of the path switching member 10670.

  Furthermore, the inner surface of the groove 10671b1 (the surface on which the preceding game ball is attracted) may be inclined radially inward toward the lower side in the gravity direction. A game ball following the preceding game ball adsorbed on the outer surface of the path switching member 10670 because the inner surface of the groove portion 10671b1 (the surface on which the preceding game ball is attracted) is inclined radially inward toward the lower side in the gravitational direction. When the is attracted (hangs down), the preceding game ball can be easily displaced downward. Therefore, the game ball that follows along with the preceding game ball can be dropped from the outer surface of the path switching member 10670.

  In the tenth embodiment, the case where two game balls are adsorbed on the outer peripheral surface of the path switching member 10670 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, when three game balls are adsorbed, the adsorbing between the preceding game ball and the path switching member 10670 may be canceled by the load. Alternatively, the preceding first game ball may be sent to the second path 10642, the second game ball to the third path 10642, and the third game ball to the collection port. .

  In the first to third embodiments, the second rolling portion 381c extending along the outer surface of the rotating bodies 372R, 2372R, and 3372R is formed above the axis of the rotating bodies 372R, 2372R, and 3372R. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the second rolling portion 381c may be formed below the axis of the rotating bodies 372R, 2372R, and 3372R. In this case, when the preceding game ball is adsorbed on the outer surface of the rotator 372R, 2372R, 3372R and the game ball following the preceding game ball is adsorbed, the preceding game ball and the rotator 372R, 2372R, 3372R are attracted. It is easy to release the adsorption with the outer surface of the.

  In the first to third embodiments, the case where the groove portions 372Rc2, 2372Rc2, and 3372Rc2 formed in the rotating bodies 372R, 2372R, and 3372R are formed to be recessed has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. . For example, the groove portions 372Rc2, 2372Rc2, 3372Rc2 may be formed on the same peripheral surface as the outer peripheral surface of the rotating bodies 372R, 2372R, 3372R.

  In this case, when the preceding game ball is adsorbed on the outer surface of the rotator 372R, 2372R, 3372R and the game ball following the preceding game ball is adsorbed, the preceding game ball and the rotator 372R, 2372R, 3372R are attracted. It is easy to release the adsorption with the outer surface of the.

  Further, the groove portions 372Rc2, 2372Rc2, 3372Rc2 may be formed to protrude from the outer peripheral surface of the rotating bodies 372R, 2372R, 3372R. In this case, when the preceding game ball is attracted to the outer surface of the rotating bodies 372R, 2372R, and 3372R and the game ball that follows the preceding game ball is attracted, the preceding game ball is removed from the grooves 372Rc2, 2372Rc2, 3372Rc2. Easy to move. The adsorption of the preceding game ball and the outer surface of the rotating body 372R, 2372R, 3372R can be easily released.

  In the seventh embodiment, the case where the through hole 7613e is formed to penetrate from the back surface of the central cover member 7613 to the front surface is described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the through hole 7613e is recessed in the back surface of the central cover member 7613. Things can be used. Further, the game ball may be held at a portion protruding from the back surface side of the central cover member 7613 instead of being recessed.

  In this case, when the following game ball collides with the preceding game ball, the following game ball repels the through hole 632a, so that the central cover member 7613 and the base plate 630 face each other. It is preferable to set the interval between them to be approximately the same as the diameter dimension of the two game balls.

  In the said 7th Embodiment, although the width | variety of the connection hole 632b was set substantially the same as the diameter of a game ball, it is not necessarily restricted to this. For example, the width of the connection hole 632b may be set to a dimension that is sufficiently larger than the diameter of the game ball (for example, the diameter dimension of two game balls).

  In this case, the inner edge portion of the through hole 7613e on the side away from the through hole 632a is displaced in the left-right direction of the base plate 630 between the side surface of the connecting hole 632b on the side away from the through hole 632a and the radius of the game ball. Preferably, it is formed at a different position. According to this, when the following game ball collides with the preceding game ball sent to the inner edge portion of the through hole 7613e, the following game ball can be easily repelled to the through hole 632a side.

  In the seventh embodiment, the case has been described in which the width between the opposing sides of the connecting hole 632b is set to be approximately the same as the diameter of the game ball, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, a value larger than the diameter of the game ball (for example, 1.2 times the diameter of the game ball) may be set. In this case, the game ball can be easily discharged from the connection hole 632b, so that the game hole can be prevented from being clogged in the connection hole 632b.

  In this case, the inner edge of the through hole 7613e on the side close to the through hole 632a is displaced in the left-right direction of the base plate 630 between the side surface of the connecting hole 632b on the side close to the through hole 632a and the radius of the game ball. Preferably, it is formed at a different position. According to this, when the following game ball collides with the preceding game ball sent to the inner edge portion of the through hole 7613e, the following game ball can be easily repelled to the through hole 632a side.

  Although the case where the through hole 7613e is formed in a substantially circular shape has been described in the seventh embodiment, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the through-hole 7613e may be formed in the shape of a long hole extending in the left-right direction of the base plate 630, and the width dimension in the short-side direction may be increased toward the outer side in the left-right direction. In this case, the game ball sent from the connection hole 632b can be easily displaced in the left-right direction due to the inner edge shape of the through hole 7613e. Therefore, since the degree of freedom can be given to the arrangement of the through holes 7613e, the degree of freedom in design can be improved.

  In the eighth and ninth embodiments, the number of game balls that ride on the upper portions of the variable plates 8644ba and 9644a is set to two. However, the number of game balls is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the plates of the variable plates 8644ba and 9644a The operation of the variable plates 8644ba and 9644a may be switched between a case where two game balls ride on the upper part and a case where three game balls ride on the upper part. That is, since the operations of the variable plates 8644ba and 9644a can be arbitrarily set, the degree of design freedom can be improved.

  In the second embodiment, the case where the magnet 2372Rb is formed to be helically bent in the axial direction of the rotating body 2372R has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, a linear magnet may be used.

  In this case, it is preferable that the magnet 2372Rb is disposed so as to be inclined in the rotation direction of the rotating body 2372R toward the upstream side of the second rolling portion 381c. As a result, the game ball rolling on the second rolling portion 381c can be easily attracted to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 2372R.

  You may implement this invention in the pachinko machine etc. of a different type from said each embodiment. For example, once a big hit, a pachinko machine that raises the expected value of the big hit until a big hit state occurs (for example, two times or three times) including that (for example, a two-time right item, a three-time right item) May also be implemented. Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a special area such as a V-zone and has a special gaming state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, the game machine may be implemented as various game machines such as an alepatchi, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a game machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating a control lever in a state where a symbol effective line is determined by inserting coins, and a symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating a stop button. Is. Accordingly, the basic concept of the slot machine is that it is provided with a display device for confirming and displaying the identification information after variably displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and resulting from the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variation display of the identification information is started, and the variation display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific condition. In this case, the game medium is typically a coin, medal, etc. Take as an example.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided that displays a symbol after a symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols is variably displayed, and has a handle for launching a ball. What is not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of spheres based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the change of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or With the passage of time, the variation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the determined symbol at the time of stoppage is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large amount of balls are paid out to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only a ball can be handled as a gaming value in the gaming hall. Therefore, the gaming value seen in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of the gaming machine can be solved.

  The concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention is shown below.

<About the concept of the invention in which the movable ball accessory device 300 is an example>
In a gaming machine including a displacement member that is displaceably disposed at a position that can be visually recognized by a player and that switches a flow path of a game ball in accordance with the displacement position, one or a plurality of light-emitting means formed to emit light. A substrate member mounted with the light emitting surface facing the front side; and a first transmissive member and a second transmissive member which are disposed on the front side of the substrate member and are formed of a light transmissive material. It is formed from a permeable material and is disposed on the front side of the second transmissive member, and a distance between the second transmissive member and the substrate member is between the first transmissive member and the substrate member. A gaming machine A1 that is set to a distance different from the distance.

  Here, there is known a gaming machine that includes a displacement member that is displaceably disposed at a position that can be visually recognized by a player and that switches a flow path of a game ball in accordance with the displacement position (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 8-131612). . In this case, the displacement member is arranged on the front side of the transmission member formed of the light transmission material, and the light is transmitted from the rear surface of the transmission member so that the player can visually recognize the displacement member together with the light transmitted through the transmission member. Also known is a technique of paying attention to a displacement member. However, in the conventional technology described above, since the displacement member is formed of a non-transmissive material that does not transmit light, the area (area) of light that is visually recognized by the player is reduced by the size of the displacement member, The production effect is hindered.

  In response to this, the applicant of the present application forms the displacement member from a light transmissive material so that the player can also visually recognize the light transmitted through the displacement member in addition to the transmission member, and the player can visually recognize the light region ( Technology to ensure (area) was developed (unknown at the time of this application). However, it has been found that when the displacement member is made of a light transmissive material, it is difficult for the player to specify the position of the displacement member.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, one or a plurality of light emitting means formed so as to be able to emit light is mounted with the light emitting surface facing the front side and disposed on the front side of the board member. A first transmitting member and a second transmitting member formed from a light transmitting material, and the displacement member is formed from the light transmitting material and disposed on the front side of the second transmitting member, Since the distance between the board member and the first transmission member is different from the distance between the board member, the position of the displacement member is secured while ensuring a light area (area) to be visually recognized by the player. Can be easily identified by the player. That is, since the distance from the light emitting means is different between the first transmissive member and the second transmissive member, it is possible to vary the diffusion mode of light when passing through the first transmissive member and the second transmissive member. Therefore, the mode of the light transmitted through the first transmission member and visually recognized by the player can be made different from the mode of the light transmitted through the second transmission member and visually recognized by the player. As a result, the player can easily identify the position of the displacement member disposed on the front side of the second transmission member.

  When a plurality of light emitting means are mounted on the substrate member, the light emitting means is provided in both the first region facing the first transmitting member and the second region facing the second transmitting member in the region of the substrate member. It is not necessary to be mounted, and it is sufficient if it is mounted in at least one of the first and second regions. Further, the light emitting means may be mounted at a position overlapping both the first area and the second area.

  In the gaming machine A1, an irregularity is formed on at least one of the front surface and the back surface of the first transmission member and the second transmission member.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1, the first transmitting member and the second transmitting member are provided with irregularities on at least one of the front and back surfaces, so that the first light emitted from the light emitting means is emitted. Light transmitted through the transmissive member and the second transmissive member can be easily diffused by the unevenness. In this case, since the distance from the light emitting means is different between the first transmission member and the second transmission member, the diffusion mode of light transmitted through the first transmission member and the diffusion mode of light transmitted through the second transmission member Can be different. Therefore, the difference between the mode of light that is transmitted through the first transmitting member and visually recognized by the player and the mode of light that is transmitted through the second transmitting member and visually recognized by the player can be further increased. As a result, the player can easily identify the position of the displacement member disposed on the front side of the second transmission member.

  In the gaming machine A2, the unevenness formed on the first transmitting member and the unevenness formed on the second transmitting member are substantially the same.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A2, the unevenness formed on the first transmission member and the unevenness formed on the second transmission member are substantially the same, so that light from the light emitting means is emitted. In a state where no light is emitted, the player can visually recognize the first transmitting member and the second transmitting member (the second transmitting member that can be viewed through the displacement member) as the same appearance. That is, the first transmissive member and the second transmissive member, which have different appearances (light modes) after the light emitting means emit light, have the same appearance before the light emitting means emits light. It is possible to enhance the effect that the appearance (light mode) of the two transmissive members is different (different).

  Note that even if the first transmission member and the second transmission member have the same unevenness, the first transmission member and the second transmission member have different distances from the light emitting means between the first transmission member and the second transmission member. It is possible to vary the diffusion mode of light when passing through each. That is, the mode of light that is transmitted through the first transmission member and visually recognized by the player can be different from the mode of light that is transmitted through the second transmission member and visually recognized by the player.

  Any of the gaming machines A1 to A3, comprising a connecting member that connects the first transmitting member and the second transmitting member.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the gaming machine A4 includes the connecting member that connects the first transmitting member and the second transmitting member, so that the first transmitting member or the second transmitting member The light transmitted through one of them (the one with the smaller distance to the light emitting means) is the other of the first transmitting member or the second transmitting member (the one with the larger distance to the light emitting means) and the light emitting means. It is possible to suppress the intrusion between the connecting members. As a result, the first transmission member and the second transmission member can easily make different modes of light (particularly light and dark) that pass through them and are visually recognized by the player. As a result, the player can easily identify the position of the displacement member disposed on the front side of the second transmission member.

  In the gaming machine A4, the first transmission member and the second transmission member are formed with irregularities on at least one of the front and back surfaces, and the unevenness is not formed on the front or back surfaces of the connecting members. A gaming machine A5.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A4, the first transmission member and the second transmission member are provided with irregularities on at least one of the front and rear surfaces, and the front and rear surfaces of the connecting members are irregular. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the first transmissive member and the second transmissive member (second transmissive member as seen through the displacement member) and the connecting member as different appearances. Accordingly, the boundary between the first transmission member and the second transmission member can be clarified using the connecting member, and as a result, the position of the displacement member disposed on the front side of the second transmission member can be determined by the player. It can be easily identified.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A5, a distance between one of the first transmissive member or the second transmissive member and the light emitting means is different from that of the first transmissive member or the second transmissive member. A gaming machine A6, wherein the gaming machine A6 has a larger distance than the light emitting means, and the one is positioned above the other in the direction of gravity.

  According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects exerted by any of the gaming machines A1 to A5, the distance between one of the first transmission member or the second transmission member and the light emitting means is the first transmission member or the first transmission member. Since the distance between the other of the two transmissive members and the light emitting means is made larger, and one of them is located above the other in the direction of gravity, the light emitting means can be prevented from being damaged.

  That is, on the side where the distance to the light emitting means is small (narrow), compared to the side where the distance to the light emitting means is large (wide), the space becomes narrower, so that the heat generated from the light emitting means This increases the temperature of the light emitting means, which increases the risk of damage to the light emitting means. On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A6, the air whose temperature is increased in the space on the side (narrow) side where the distance from the light emitting means is small is changed to the space located above the gravity direction (that is, the light emitting means). Can be lifted to a large (wide) space) to escape. As a result, damage to the light emitting means on the side where the distance is small (narrow) can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine A6, a distance between the first transmissive member and the light emitting means is made larger than a distance between the second transmissive member and the light emitting means, and the displacement member and the second transmissive member are The gaming machine A7 is characterized in that a space between the two is a first downflow path of the game ball.

  According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A6, the distance between the first transmission member and the light emitting means is made larger than the distance between the second transmission member and the light emitting means, Since the space between the second transmissive member and the second transmissive member is the first flow path of the game ball, the unit composed of the displacement member, the first transmissive member, and the second transmissive member can be downsized. That is, the space between the displacement member and the second transmission member formed to change the mode of light to be visually recognized by the player is used as the first flow path of the game ball, thereby effectively utilizing the dead space. It is not necessary to secure a separate space for the flow path. Therefore, the unit can be reduced in size accordingly.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A7, the displacement member is formed as a plate-like body whose base end side is rotatably supported, and a plate thickness portion having a large plate thickness is formed on the tip end side. A gaming machine A8 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines A1 to A7, the displacement member is formed as a plate-like body that is pivotally supported at the base end side and has a plate thickness at the tip end side. Since the thick plate thickness portion is formed, out of the light that passes through the displacement member and is visible to the player, the light that passes through the plate thickness portion and is visible to the player It can be different from the light that is transmitted through the portion and visually recognized by the player. Further, as the displacement member is rotated about the proximal end side, the position of light that is visible through the distal end side (plate thickness portion) can be displaced. That is, it is possible to make the player easily recognize the displacement (rotation) operation of the displacement member by utilizing the fact that the position of the light that is visible through the distal end side (plate thickness portion) of the displacement member is displaced.

  In the gaming machine A8, the gaming machine A9 is characterized in that at least one of the front surface and the back surface of the thick plate portion is curved in a circular arc shape.

  According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A8, since at least one of the front surface and the back surface of the plate thickness portion is curved in a circular arc shape, the plate thickness portion functions as a lens (ie, The light incident on the plate thickness portion can be refracted and diverged or focused). Accordingly, among the light that is transmitted through the displacement member and is visually recognized by the player, the light that is transmitted through the plate thickness portion and is visually recognized by the player and the other portions except the plate thickness portion are transmitted to the player. The difference from the visually recognized light can be made clearer. As a result, the player can easily recognize the displacement (rotation) operation of the displacement member.

  In the gaming machine A8 or A9, the gaming machine A10 is formed so that the displacement member can be disposed at a position substantially flush with the first transmission member.

  According to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A8 or A9, the displacement member is formed so as to be disposed at a position that is substantially flush with the first transmission member. The area (area) of the light that is emitted from the light emitting means and made visible to the player can be viewed as a larger area.

  The gaming machine A10 includes a rolling member that is inclined downward toward the front surface of the displacement member and the game ball rolls, and the height position at the downstream end of the rolling member is substantially the same as that of the first transmission member. The gaming machine A11 is characterized in that it is made lower by the radius of the game ball than the height position in the plate thickness portion of the displacement member arranged at a single position.

  According to the gaming machine A11, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A10, the gaming machine A11 includes a rolling member that is inclined downward toward the front of the displacement member and the gaming ball rolls, and the height position at the downstream end of the rolling member However, since it is made lower by the radius of the game ball than the height position in the plate thickness part of the displacement member arranged at a position substantially flush with the first transmission member, the rolling part rolls from the downstream end. The game ball sent toward the front of the displacement member can be made to collide with the thickness portion of the displacement member whose strength is relatively increased by increasing the thickness. Thereby, damage to a displacement member can be controlled.

<Concept of Invention with Variable Unit 360 as an Example>
A rotation member having a substantially cylindrical shape that is formed to be rotatable in a posture in which a rotation axis is directed in a horizontal direction, and a magnet that is disposed on the rotation member and attracts a game ball to an outer peripheral surface of the rotation member; In the gaming machine for feeding the adsorbed game ball in the rotation direction of the rotating member by rotating the rotating member with the game ball adsorbed on the surface, the rotating member is aligned with the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member. A gaming machine B1 provided with a rolling surface on which a game ball rolls, the rolling surface being positioned above the rotational axis of the rotating member in the direction of gravity.

  Here, a substantially cylindrical rotating member that is formed to be rotatable in a posture in which the rotation axis is directed in the horizontal direction, and a magnet that is disposed on the rotating member and attracts the game ball to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member, A gaming machine is known in which a rotating ball is rotated in a state in which a gaming ball is adsorbed on an outer peripheral surface, thereby sending the gaming ball in the rotation direction of the rotating member (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-231890). Publication). When two game balls are rolled in a row toward the rotating member, the preceding game ball is adsorbed on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member, and the subsequent game ball is adsorbed on the preceding game ball. There is a case. In this case, when the rotating member is rotated, the weight of two balls acts, and there is a problem that the adsorption between the rotating member and the preceding game ball is released.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, a rolling surface is provided in parallel with the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member and the game ball rolls, and the rolling surface is above the rotational axis of the rotating member in the gravitational direction. For example, the rolling surface is rolled in a state where two game balls are linked to the rotating member, and the preceding game ball is adsorbed to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member, and the preceding game When a game ball that follows the ball is adsorbed, the preceding game ball can be easily placed on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member. Therefore, the adsorption between the rotating member and the preceding game ball can be hardly released.

  In the gaming machine B1, a receiving surface that receives a game ball that is juxtaposed to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member on the opposite side of the rolling surface across the rotating member and that is attracted to and sent to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member. The gaming machine B2 is characterized in that its receiving surface is positioned above the rotational axis of the rotating member in the direction of gravity.

  Here, the game ball attracted and sent by the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member is received by a receiving surface arranged in parallel to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member on the opposite side of the rolling surface across the rotating member. In addition, there is a problem that the game ball easily jumps on the receiving surface, and it is difficult to smoothly send the game ball from the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member to the receiving surface.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B1, the receiving surface is located above the rotational axis of the rotating member in the gravitational direction, so that the game ball is prevented from jumping on the receiving surface. The game ball can be smoothly sent from the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member to the receiving surface. That is, according to the gaming machine B2, before the displacement component downward in the gravitational direction increases with the rotation of the rotating member (that is, at a stage where the horizontal component is relatively large), the receiving surface receives the game ball. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the game ball from bouncing on the receiving surface. In addition, before the receiving surface receives the game ball, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being released from the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member to the receiving surface by releasing the adsorption of the game ball. Also from this point, it is possible to suppress the game ball from bouncing on the receiving surface.

  In the gaming machine B2, the receiving surface is formed so as to be inclined downward in a direction away from the rotating member.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B2, the receiving surface is formed to be inclined downward toward the direction away from the rotating member, so that it is attracted to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member and The direction in which the game ball is sent along with the rotation can be made closer to the rolling direction of the game ball after being received by the receiving surface. As a result, the game ball can be smoothly sent from the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member to the receiving surface while the game ball is prevented from jumping on the receiving surface.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the rotating member includes a concave portion provided in an outer peripheral surface thereof, and the magnet is disposed at a position for attracting the game ball to the inner surface of the concave portion. Characteristic gaming machine B4.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects exerted by any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the rotating member has a recessed portion that is recessed in the outer peripheral surface, and the magnet is a position that attracts the game ball to the inner surface of the recessed portion. Therefore, the game ball can be supported by the inner surface of the recess (the step between the outer peripheral surface). As a result, for example, the rolling surface is rolled in a state where two game balls are linked to the rotating member, and the preceding gaming ball is attracted to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member, and the preceding gaming ball is When a subsequent game ball is sucked, it is difficult to release the suction between the rotating member and the preceding game ball.

  In the gaming machine B4, the recessed depth of the recess is set to a dimension such that the gaming ball is not in contact with the bottom surface of the recess when the gaming ball is fitted in the recess. .

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine B4, the depth of the recessed portion is set to a dimension that prevents the gaming ball from coming into non-contact with the bottom surface of the recessed portion when the gaming ball is fitted in the recessed portion. Therefore, the inner edge of the recess (the ridge line between the inner surface of the recess and the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member) can be brought into contact with the game ball. Therefore, when the game ball is sent along with the rotation of the rotation member, it is possible to suppress the game ball from wobbling in the rotation direction of the rotation member, and as a result, it is possible to suppress the adsorption of the game ball from being released.

  In particular, when a game ball is sent along with the rotation of the rotating member, the direction of the vertical component of gravity acting on the game ball before and after the game ball (concave portion) passes through the uppermost position in the gravity direction. Since it reverses, the game ball tends to wobble in the rotation direction of the rotating member due to the reaction of the reverse rotation. On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B5, the inner edge of the recess (the ridge line between the inner surface of the recess and the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member) can be brought into contact with the game ball, that is, the game is played from both sides in the rotating direction of the rotating member. Since the ball can be sandwiched by the inner edge of the recess, it is possible to prevent the game ball from wobbling in the rotation direction of the rotating member, and as a result, it is possible to suppress the adsorption of the game ball from being released.

  In the gaming machine B4, a receiving surface that receives the game balls that are juxtaposed to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member on the opposite side of the rolling surface across the rotating member and that are attracted to and sent to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member. The recessed depth of the recess is set to a dimension that allows the game ball to contact the bottom surface of the recess in a state where the game ball is fitted in the recess, and more than the rolling surface side. A gaming machine B6 characterized in that the receiving surface side is set to a small size.

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine B4, the depth of the recessed portion is set to a dimension that allows the gaming ball to come into contact with the bottom surface of the recessed portion with the gaming ball fitted in the recessed portion. In addition, since the receiving surface side is set to a smaller size than the rolling surface side, when the game ball that is sent along with the rotation of the rotating member wobbles in the rotating direction of the rotating member, the game ball is recessed. Can be easily rolled (dropped) from the receiving side to the receiving side. That is, it is possible to prevent the adsorption of the game ball from being released and returning to the rolling surface.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B6, the rolling surface is formed as an inclined surface for rolling the gaming ball in a direction substantially parallel to the direction of the rotation axis of the rotating member. .

  According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines B1 to B6, the rolling surface is formed as an inclined surface that rolls the gaming ball in a direction substantially parallel to the direction of the rotation axis of the rotating member. Thus, the rolling direction of the game ball rolling on the rolling surface and the pitching direction of the game ball sent along with the rotation of the rotating member can be set to be substantially orthogonal. As a result, the movement of the game ball is changed, and the number of game balls visible at a time can be ensured to improve the interest of the player.

  The gaming machine B7 includes a blocking unit that blocks the rolling of the game ball on the rolling surface, and the magnet of the rotating member is disposed at a position that can be attracted to the game ball whose rolling is blocked by the blocking unit. A gaming machine B8 characterized by being played.

  According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine B7, the gaming machine B8 includes a blocking means for blocking the rolling of the game ball on the rolling surface, and the magnet of the rotating member has a rolling ball blocked by the blocking means. Since the game ball that rolls on the rolling surface is directly attracted to the rotating member and the game ball that rolls on the rolling surface is blocked by the blocking means, it is rotated. A form that is attracted to the member (ie, a form in which a game ball that would have passed without being attracted to the rotating member unless blocked by the blocking means is blocked by the blocking means and can be attracted to the rotating member) As a result, the interest of the player can be improved.

<Concept of Invention Taking Variable Unit 2360 as an Example>
A rotation member having a substantially cylindrical shape that is formed to be rotatable in a posture in which a rotation axis is directed in a horizontal direction, and a magnet that is disposed on the rotation member and attracts a game ball to an outer peripheral surface of the rotation member; In the gaming machine for feeding the adsorbed game ball in the rotation direction of the rotating member by rotating the rotating member with the game ball adsorbed on the surface, the rotating member is aligned with the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member. And a rolling surface for rolling the game ball in a direction substantially parallel to the direction of the rotation axis of the rotary member, and the magnet has an adsorption position at which the game ball is attracted to the outer peripheral surface of the rotary member. The gaming machine C1 is arranged at least at an upstream position that is upstream of the rolling surface with respect to the suction position.

  Here, a substantially cylindrical rotating member that is formed to be rotatable in a posture in which the rotation axis is directed in the horizontal direction, and a magnet that is disposed on the rotating member and attracts the game ball to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member, A gaming machine is known in which a rotating ball is rotated in a state in which a gaming ball is adsorbed on an outer peripheral surface, thereby sending the gaming ball in the rotation direction of the rotating member (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-231890). Publication). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, since the game ball rolls while rolling on the rolling surface, the rotating member rotates, and the gaming ball rolls on the rolling surface at a timing at which it can face the suction position of the rotating member. Even when it has moved, there is a problem that the game ball is difficult to be attracted to the attracting position.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, the magnets are disposed at least at an adsorption position where the game ball is adsorbed on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member and an upstream position upstream of the rolling surface from the adsorption position. Therefore, the game ball can be attracted to the outer peripheral surface side of the rotating member by the magnetic force of the magnet disposed at the upstream position, and the rolling movement of the game ball can be suppressed while swinging. As a result, when the rotation member is rotated and the game ball rolls on the rolling surface at a timing at which the rotation member can face the adsorption position, the game ball can be easily adsorbed to the adsorption position.

  Note that the magnet disposed at the attracting position and the magnet disposed at the upstream position may be formed separately (that is, two magnets) or may be formed integrally. (That is, one magnet).

  In the gaming machine C1, the rotating member is provided with a recess that is recessed in the outer peripheral surface thereof and serves as the suction position.

  Here, it is necessary that the game ball is attracted to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member at the attracting position, while the game ball is not attracted to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member at the upstream position. To achieve this by the difference in magnetic force between the magnets (ie, a magnet having a strong magnetic force is disposed at the attracting position and a magnet having a weak magnetic force is disposed at the upstream position), two types of magnets having different magnetic forces are prepared. It is necessary to increase the product cost.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C1, the rotating member includes a recessed portion that is recessed in the outer peripheral surface thereof and serves as an adsorption position, so that one magnet is embedded in the rotating member. By using the recess, the distance from the magnet to the game ball at the attracting position (the distance from the magnet to the bottom surface of the recess), the distance from the magnet to the game ball at the upstream position) from the magnet to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member The distance can be set smaller than (distance). That is, it is possible to attract the game ball to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member at the attracting position, while preventing the game ball from being attracted to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member at the upstream position. Therefore, two types of magnets are not required, and it is not necessary to complicate the shape of the magnets, so that the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

  Further, when the game ball is attracted to the attracting position, the game ball can be held by the recess. Therefore, when the game ball is sent along with the rotation of the rotation member, it is possible to suppress the game ball from wobbling in the rotation direction of the rotation member, and as a result, it is possible to suppress the adsorption of the game ball from being released.

  In this case, it is preferable that the recessed depth of the recessed portion is set to a dimension in which the gaming ball is not in contact with the bottom surface of the recessed portion with the gaming ball fitted in the recessed portion. This is because the inner edge of the recess (the ridge line between the inner surface of the recess and the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member) is brought into contact with the game ball, and the play of the game ball can be easily suppressed. However, the recessed depth of the recess may be a dimension in which the game ball is brought into contact with the bottom surface of the recess with the game ball fitted in the recess.

  In the gaming machine C1 or C2, at least a part of the portion disposed at the upstream position of the magnet is disposed on the front side in the rotation direction of the rotating member with respect to the portion disposed at the suction position. A gaming machine C3 characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1 or C2, the magnet is such that at least a part of the portion disposed at the upstream position is in the rotational direction of the rotating member rather than the portion disposed at the attracting position. Since it is disposed on the front side, the magnetic force of the magnet at the upstream position can be easily applied to the game ball against the game ball rolling on the rolling surface toward the attracting position. That is, the game ball can be attracted to the outer peripheral surface side of the rotating member, and the rolling movement of the game ball while swinging on the rolling surface can be suppressed. As a result, when the rotation member is rotated and the game ball rolls on the rolling surface at a timing at which the rotation member can face the adsorption position, the game ball can be easily adsorbed to the adsorption position.

  In the gaming machine C2 or C3, the bottom surface of the recess is inclined upward toward the upstream position and smoothly connected to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member, and at least at the upstream position side, a game ball is placed on the bottom surface of the recess. A gaming machine C4 that is formed so as to be capable of contacting.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C2 or C3, the bottom surface of the recess is inclined upwardly toward the upstream position and smoothly connected to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member, at least at the upstream position side, Since the game ball can be brought into contact with the bottom surface of the recess, the game ball attracted to the outer peripheral surface side of the rotating member by the magnet at the upstream position is inserted into the recess by the magnet at the suction position. The sphere can be smoothly fitted into the concave portion. That is, it is possible to prevent the game ball from bouncing (bound) and to easily attract the game ball to the suction position (concave portion).

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C4, the game machine includes a partition wall standing from the rolling surface and defining a rolling area of a game ball while facing the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member, and the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member and the The facing distance between the partition walls is set to a smaller size as it goes downstream of the rolling surface.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects exerted by any of the gaming machines C1 to C4, a partition wall that stands up from the rolling surface and divides the rolling region of the game ball is opposed to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member. Since the facing distance between the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member and the partition wall is set to a smaller dimension toward the downstream side of the rolling surface, not only the action by the magnet at the upstream position (attraction by magnetic force) but also the partition Also by the guidance by the wall, it is possible to prevent the game ball from rolling while swinging on the rolling surface. As a result, when the rotation member is rotated and the game ball rolls on the rolling surface at a timing at which the rotation member can face the adsorption position, the game ball can be easily adsorbed to the adsorption position.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C5, a game that is juxtaposed with the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member on the opposite side of the rolling surface with the rotating member interposed therebetween and is attracted to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member and sent to the ball A gaming machine C6 comprising a receiving surface for receiving a ball, wherein the receiving surface is formed to be inclined downward in a direction away from the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member.

  According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines C1 to C5, the gaming machine C6 is juxtaposed on the outer circumferential surface of the rotating member on the opposite side of the rolling surface across the rotating member, and on the outer circumferential surface of the rotating member. A receiving surface for receiving the game balls sucked and sent is provided, and the receiving surface is formed to be inclined downward toward the direction away from the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member, so that the outer peripheral surface (suction position) of the rotating member When the game ball attracted and sent by the ball is received by the receiving surface, the game ball can be rolled by the downward inclination of the receiving surface, and the game ball can be quickly separated from the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member. That is, the game ball is attracted to the magnet at the upstream position, or the action of the magnetic force is applied, so that the rolling of the game ball on the receiving surface can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine C6, the receiving surface has a length dimension along the rotation axis direction larger than a length dimension along the rotation axis direction of the magnet disposed on the rotation member. A gaming machine C7 characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C6, the receiving surface has a length dimension along the rotation axis direction that is longer than the length dimension along the rotation axis direction of the magnet disposed on the rotation member. Is set to a large size, so that the game ball is attracted to a portion that is not the attracting position of the rotating member (that is, attracted to the magnet at the upstream position), and the game ball is accompanied by the rotation of the rotating member. Even when a ball is sent, such a game ball can be received on the receiving surface.

<About the concept of the invention taking the winning prize unit 600 as an example>
In a gaming machine comprising a first entrance and a second entrance disposed downstream of the game area from the first entrance, the game enters the first entrance. A passage member that forms a passage of a game ball that flows down without being balled, a game board in which the game area is formed on the front side, and a plate that can protrude to the front side of the game board and can be immersed in the back side And a game ball that has passed through the passage member can be guided to the second entrance by a slide member that protrudes toward the front side of the game board. Game machine D1.

  Here, a gaming machine provided with a first entrance and a second entrance is known (for example, JP-A-2005-013496). In this case, the game balls that have not entered the first entrance are not entered into the second entrance, but only collected from the out entrance. Therefore, if a game ball launched at the first entrance does not enter the first entrance, the player expects the subsequent whereabouts of the game ball (the game ball flowing down). Can't have. For this reason, there has been a problem that it is not possible to give the player enough interest.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, a path member that forms a path of a game ball that flows down without entering the first entrance, a game board in which a game area is formed on the front side, and the game And a plate-like slide member formed so as to be able to protrude to the front side of the board and to be able to enter the back side, and the game ball that has passed through the passage member is secondly moved by the slide member protruding to the front side of the game board. It is possible to be guided to the entrance of the first entrance, so even if a game ball does not enter the first entrance, pay attention to the flow of the game ball and enter the second entrance. The player can continue to have expectations for. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, since the slide member is formed so as to be able to protrude to the front side of the game board and immerse to the back side, in a state where the slide member is not functioning, it is possible to immerse it in the back side of the game board, and accordingly the game Space can be secured on the front side of the board (game area can be expanded). That is, the area where the game ball can move in the game area can be expanded.

  As the passage member, for example, a passage formed as a closed passage through which a game ball can pass, a member formed by one or a plurality of nails that define the flow direction of the game ball, and the game ball can roll. What is formed as an inclined surface (open passage) is exemplified.

  Further, even when the slide member is immersed in the back side of the game board, it is naturally possible that the game ball that has passed through the passage member can enter the second entrance. In this case, it is preferable that the state in which the slide member is protruded is easier to enter the second entrance than the state in which the slide member is immersed. This is because attention can be paid to the state of the slide member, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine D1, the profit given to the player by entering the second entrance is higher than the profit given to the player by entering the first entrance A gaming machine D2 characterized in that

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D1, in addition to the benefits given to the player by entering the first entrance, the player can enter the second entrance by entering the second entrance. Since the profit given is considered to be a higher profit, even if the game ball does not enter the first entrance, the expectation that such a game ball will enter the second entrance The player can be stronger. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, as a form with a high profit given to the player, a form in which a lot of prize balls are paid out upon entering the ball, a form that can be opened and closed, and allowing / restricting the entrance to the third entrance through the opening and closing Examples include a mode in which the opening time of the movable blade piece is lengthened, a mode in which the number of times of opening the movable blade piece is increased, and a mode in which the opening range of the movable blade piece is increased.

  In the gaming machine D1 or D2, the passage member receives a game ball that flows down without entering the first entrance and a game ball that has flowed in from the first opening to the game area. A gaming machine D3, comprising: a second opening for flowing out and made of a light transmissive material.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D1 or D2, the passage member is provided with a first opening for receiving a gaming ball that flows down without entering the first entrance, and the first opening. A second opening through which the inflowing game ball flows out to the game area and is made of a light-transmitting material, so that the game ball inflowed from the first opening enters the second opening (second entrance). The player can visually recognize the mode of flowing down (passing). As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machines D1 to D3, the slide member is disposed on both sides of the second entrance in a posture in which a pair is inclined downward toward the second entrance. A gaming machine D4 to play.

  According to the gaming machine D4, the slide members are disposed on both sides of the second entrance so as to be inclined downward toward the second entrance, so that the slide members protrude. When such a state is formed, it is possible to make it easier for a game ball flowing down from either the left or right side of the second entrance to enter the second entrance. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a stronger expectation for entering the second entrance. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Here, as a configuration that makes it easy for a game ball to enter the second entrance, a pair of wing members that are pivotally supported by a rotation shaft protruding from the game board so that the base end side is rotatable are provided for the second entrance. It can be considered that the game ball is guided to the second entrance by placing the wing member at the mouth and opening the wing member (so-called tulip). However, in such a configuration, a space for rotating (opening and closing) the wing member is required in the game area. In particular, in order to form a posture in which the wing member is closed, a space is required above the second entrance. Therefore, it enlarges in the up-and-down direction, and the arrangement space of other members (for example, the 1st entrance and a liquid crystal display device) decreases.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines D1 to D3, a pair of plate-like slide members formed so as to be able to protrude to the front side of the gaming board and to be immersive to the back side. However, since it is disposed on both sides of the second entrance in a posture that is inclined downward toward the second entrance, downsizing can be achieved in the vertical direction. As a result, an arrangement space for other members (for example, the first entrance and the liquid crystal display device) can be secured.

  In the gaming machine D4, the second opening of the passage member is disposed above the slide member in the direction of gravity, the gaming machine D5.

  According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D4, the second opening of the passage member is disposed above the sliding member in the gravitational direction. It is possible to make it easier to enter the second entrance. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a stronger expectation for entering the second entrance. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine D5, two sets of the first entrance and the passage member are provided, and the second opening of the passage member of one of the two sets is included in the pair of slide members. A gaming machine D6, wherein the second opening of the passage member of the other set is disposed above the direction of gravity of one slide member, and is disposed above the direction of gravity of the other slide member.

  According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D5, two sets of the first entrance and the passage member are provided, and the second opening of the passage member of one of the two sets is Since one slide member of the pair of slide members is disposed above the gravity direction of the other slide member, the second opening of the other pair of passage members is disposed above the other slide member in the gravity direction. Each of the slide members can be used to make it easier to enter the game ball into the second entrance. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a stronger expectation for entering the second entrance. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  The two sets of the first entrance and the passage member are spaced apart from each other on both the left and right sides of the second entrance (for example, the second entrance is the width of the game area). It is preferable that the two sets are arranged symmetrically in the width direction with the second entrance opening interposed therebetween. A game ball that flows down one side or the other side of the game area in the width direction with respect to the second starting port can be easily entered into the second entrance, and enters the second entrance. This is because the player can have a stronger expectation to play a ball.

  In the gaming machine D6, the edge on the second entrance side of the slide member is located between the lower edge in the gravity direction and the upper edge in the gravity direction of the second entrance. A gaming machine D7 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D6, the edge on the second entrance side of the slide member has a lower edge in the gravity direction and an upper edge in the gravity direction of the second entrance. When the game ball is sent (displaced) in the width direction of the game area, the edge of the slide member in the protruded state on the second entrance side To make it easier to enter the second entrance. That is, a game ball sent (displaced) from one side in the width direction of the game area passes through the second entrance and is sent (displaced) to the other side in the width direction (the game ball enters the second entrance). Escaping in the width direction of the gaming area without entering the ball opening) can be suppressed.

  In any one of the gaming machines D4 to D7, the gaming machine has a bottom surface portion that protrudes from the edge of the second entrance to the front side of the game board from the lower edge in the gravitational direction. A gaming machine D8, which is formed to be inclined downward toward the mouth.

  According to the gaming machine D8, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines D4 to D7, the gaming machine D8 includes a bottom surface portion that protrudes from the lower edge in the direction of gravity of the second entrance to the front side of the gaming board. Since the portion is formed to be inclined downward toward the second entrance, the first entrance is not only in the state where the slide member is protruded but also in the state where the slide member is immersed. A game ball that has flowed down (passed through the passage member) without entering the ball entrance can easily enter the second entrance. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a stronger expectation for entering the second entrance. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine D8, on the upper surface of the bottom surface portion, a feeding surface located on the side close to the second entrance, and the second entrance than the feeding portion connected to the feeding surface. A contact surface located on the side farther from the mouth, and an angle of descending inclination of the contact surface in a direction toward the second entrance port to the second entrance port of the feed surface. A gaming machine D9 characterized in that the gaming machine D9 is set to be larger than an angle of descending inclination in the direction of heading.

  According to the gaming machine D9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D8, on the upper surface of the bottom surface portion, the feeding surface located on the side close to the second entrance, and the feeding surface connected to the feeding surface. A contact surface located farther from the second entrance than the second entrance, and the angle of inclination of the contact surface in the direction toward the second entrance is the second entrance of the feed surface. Since it is larger than the downward inclination angle in the direction toward the ball opening, it is possible to smoothly enter the game ball into the second entrance using the downward inclination of the contact surface. In particular, even when the slide member is immersed, it uses the inclination of the contact surface where the downward inclination is increased, and flows down without passing through the first entrance (passed through the passage member). ) It is possible to easily enter the game ball into the second entrance.

  In the gaming machine D3, the first opening of the passage member is positioned above the first entrance in the direction of gravity, and the first entrance is disposed inside the passage member. Characteristic gaming machine D10.

  According to the gaming machine D10, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D3, the first opening of the passage member is located above the first entrance in the direction of gravity, and the first entrance is provided inside the passage member. Therefore, a part of the game ball that has flowed into the first opening of the passage member can enter the first entrance. That is, the game ball that flows down without entering the first entrance can surely flow into the passage member. As a result, it is possible to increase the expectation of the player entering the second entrance and improve the interest of the game.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D10, the game machine includes a detection unit that detects a game ball flowing down the passage member and a drive unit that drives the slide member, and when the game ball is detected by the detection unit, A gaming machine D11, wherein a slide member is projected to the front side of the game board by driving of the driving means.

  According to the gaming machine D11, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines D1 to D10, the gaming machine D11 includes a detecting means for detecting a gaming ball flowing down the passage member and a driving means for driving the slide member, and the gaming ball is detected by the detecting means. In this case, since the slide member protrudes to the front side of the game board by driving the driving means, it is possible to easily enter the game ball into the second entrance. Therefore, even when a game ball does not enter the first entrance, the player continues to have an expectation to enter the second entrance by paying attention to the flow of the game ball. Can be made. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Note that the detection of the game ball by the detection means and the drive by the drive means (protrusion of the slide member) may be performed at the same time, or the drive may be started after the elapse of a predetermined time after the detection. . However, in the latter case, it is preferable that the driving (sliding member protruding operation) is completed before the game ball reaches the protruding position of the sliding member. This is because the function of the slide member that guides the game ball to the second entrance (makes it easy to enter) can be surely exhibited.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the sliding member forms a bottom surface continuous with the second opening of the passage member.

  According to the gaming machine D12, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the slide member forms a bottom surface (rolling surface) that is continuous with the second opening of the passage member, so that the slide member does not protrude. Even in the state of being immersed (that is, immersed), the game ball can be positioned on the slide member, and accordingly, the time for the game ball to be positioned on the slide member can be secured. Therefore, it is possible to easily enter the game ball that has passed through the passage member into the second entrance, and it is possible to give the player a stronger expectation for entering the second entrance. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine D12, a guide portion that guides a game ball located on the upper surface toward the second entrance is formed on an upper surface that forms a bottom surface of the passage member of the slide member. A gaming machine D13.

  According to the gaming machine D13, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine D12, guidance is provided on the upper surface forming the bottom surface of the passage member of the slide member to guide the game ball located on the upper surface toward the second entrance. Since the portion is formed, when the game ball is protruded from the state where the game ball is positioned on the upper surface of the slide member that is in the immersive state through the passage member, the game ball is moved to the second position by the action of the guide portion. Since it can be made to project while guiding toward the entrance of the game, it is possible to easily enter the game ball into the second entrance.

  In addition, as a guide part, as it goes to the protrusion direction front-end | tip of a slide member, it is extended in the direction close | similar to a 2nd entrance, and is provided with the protruding item | line and the ditch | groove (or these groove | channels) convexly or concavely provided on the upper surface (Combination) is exemplified. The cross-sectional shape of the ridges and grooves is arbitrary, and examples thereof include a rectangular cross section, a polygonal cross section, and an arc-shaped cross section (or a cross section having a combination thereof).

<About the concept of the invention taking the winning prize unit 600 as an example>
In a gaming machine comprising a first entrance and a second entrance disposed downstream of the game area from the first entrance, the game enters the first entrance. A passage member that forms a passage for a game ball that flows down without flowing a ball, and a second number that is less than the first number when the first number of game balls passes through the passage member. The game machine E1 further includes a changing unit that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second entrance than when the game ball passes through the passage member.

  Here, a gaming machine provided with a first entrance and a second entrance is known (for example, JP-A-2005-013496). In this case, the game balls that have not entered the first entrance are not entered into the second entrance, but only collected from the out entrance. Therefore, if a game ball launched at the first entrance does not enter the first entrance, the player expects the subsequent whereabouts of the game ball (the game ball flowing down). Can't have. For this reason, there has been a problem that it is not possible to give the player enough interest.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, when the first number of game balls pass through the passage member that forms the passage of the game ball that flows down without flowing into the first entrance, and the passage member. Is provided with changing means for making it easier for the game ball to enter the second entrance than when the second number of game balls, which is smaller than the first number, passes through the passage member. Even if a game ball does not enter the first entrance, keep the player focused on the flow of the game ball and keep the player expecting to enter the second entrance be able to. In particular, since the ease of entering the second entrance is changed depending on the number of game balls passing through the passage member, the number of game balls leaked into the entrance to the first entrance Can also draw attention to the player. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  As the passage member, for example, a passage formed as a closed passage through which a game ball can pass, a member formed by one or a plurality of nails that define the flow direction of the game ball, and the game ball can roll. What is formed as an inclined surface (open passage) is exemplified.

  Further, the first number is an integer of 1 or more, and the second number is an integer of 2 or more and a number larger than the first number. For example, when the first number is 1, the second number is a number of 2 or more, and when the first number is 2, the second number is a number of 3 or more. is there.

  In the gaming machine E1, the profit given to the player by entering the second entrance is higher than the profit given to the player by entering the first entrance A gaming machine E2 characterized in that

  In the gaming machine E1, the profit given to the player by entering the first entrance is higher than the profit given to the player by entering the second entrance. A gaming machine E3 characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine E1, the player enters the second entrance rather than the profit given to the player by entering the first entrance. Since the profit given is considered to be a higher profit, even if the game ball does not enter the first entrance, the expectation that such a game ball will enter the second entrance The player can be stronger. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine E1, the game is played by entering the first entrance rather than the profit given to the player by entering the second entrance. Since the profit given to the player is considered to be a higher profit, usually, a game ball is launched when aiming at the first entrance, and the game ball leaked into the entrance to the first entrance Can be rescued by making it possible to enter the second entrance. In particular, when the number of game balls passing through the passage member is larger than a predetermined number (when the number is the first number rather than the second number), it is easier to enter the second entrance, There is a contradiction between the expectation for entering the first entrance and the expectation for leaking into the entrance to the first entrance (that is, it is easier to enter the second entrance). Expectation can be given to the player. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, as a form with a high profit given to the player, a form in which a lot of prize balls are paid out upon entering the ball, a form that can be opened and closed, and allowing / restricting the entrance to the third entrance through the opening and closing Examples include a mode in which the opening time of the movable blade piece is lengthened, a mode in which the number of times of opening the movable blade piece is increased, and a mode in which the opening range of the movable blade piece is increased.

  In any one of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the changing unit includes a regulating unit that regulates the flow of the first game ball that passes through the passage member or flows out of the passage member. When the second game ball follows the one game ball, the second game ball is brought into contact with the first game ball whose flow is restricted so that the second game ball flows down. A gaming machine E4, characterized in that the game machine E4 is formed so as to be directed toward the second entrance.

  According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects exerted by any of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the changing means includes regulation means for regulating the flow of the first gaming ball that passes through the passage member or flows out of the passage member. When the second game ball follows the first game ball, the regulation means causes the second game ball to abut (collision) with the first game ball whose flow is regulated, Since it is formed so that the flow direction of the second game ball is directed to the second entrance, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. That is, it is easier to enter the second entrance when the first game ball and the second game ball flow down than when only the first game ball flows down (pass the passage member). The ease of entering the second entrance can be changed depending on the number of game balls to be played), so that the player also pays attention to the number of game balls that have leaked into the first entrance be able to. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine E4, the restricting means is formed as a recess recessed in a wall surface facing the outlet of the passage member.

  According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E4, the restricting means is formed as a recess recessed in the wall surface facing the outlet of the passage member, so the first flowing out from the outlet of the passage member The game ball is received in the recess, and the flow of the first game ball can be temporarily restricted (that is, the first game ball is temporarily held so that the second game ball to be followed can collide). On the other hand, the restriction on the flow-down of the first game ball can be released by the first game ball dropping out (flowing down) from the recess due to its own weight. Therefore, it is possible to restrict (hold) and release the restriction of the flow of the first game ball only by the shape of the restricting means, and to eliminate the need for an operation mechanism for switching (releasing the restriction). The product cost can be reduced.

  Further, according to the gaming machine E4, a member that guides the game ball flowing out from the exit of the passage member to the second entrance (for example, a rolling surface that is inclined downward toward the second entrance is provided). , There is no member that makes it easy to enter the game ball into the second entrance by rolling the game ball on the rolling surface (the guiding member can guide to the second entrance) The second game ball is inserted into the second entrance using the concave portion even in the state where it is formed so as to be displaceable between the position and the non-guideable position and is displaced to the non-guideable position). Can enter the ball.

  In the gaming machine E5, the outlet of the passage member includes a bottom surface on which the game ball rolls and side wall surfaces that are erected on both sides of the bottom surface in the width direction, and the facing distance between the side surfaces is a game. A gaming machine E6, characterized in that it is set to a size approximately equal to the diameter of the sphere.

  According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E5, the exit of the passage member includes a bottom surface on which the game ball rolls and side wall surfaces that are erected on both sides in the width direction of the bottom surface. Since the opposing distance between the side wall surfaces is set to a size substantially equal to the diameter of the game ball, the trajectory of the game ball flowing out from the outlet of the passage member can be easily made substantially constant, and the game ball can be controlled by a restricting means (recessed portion). Can be surely accepted.

  In gaming machine E5 or E6, gaming machine E7 is characterized in that the recessed portion has a recessed depth that increases in a direction away from the second entrance.

  According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine E5 or E6, the recessed portion is deepened toward the direction away from the second entrance, so that the game received in the recessed portion The sphere can be held while being displaced in the direction in which the recessed depth is increased (that is, the side away from the second entrance). Therefore, when the second game ball abuts (collises) with the first game ball held in the concave portion, it is easy to enter the second game ball toward the second entrance. it can.

  In any of the gaming machines E5 to E7, a slide member is provided that is formed so as to be capable of appearing and retracting and is disposed at a position between the outlet of the passage member and the concave portion and below the gravity direction, The gaming machine E8, wherein the slide member is formed so that the game ball can be guided to the second entrance when the slide member is protruded.

  According to the gaming machine E8, in any of the gaming machines E5 to E7, it is formed so as to be capable of appearing and retracting, and is disposed at a position between the outlet of the passage member and the concave portion and below the gravity direction. The slide member includes a slide member. When the slide member is protruded, the game ball is formed so as to be guided to the second entrance, so that the first game ball held in the recess is protruded from the slide member. Can be used to enter the second entrance. That is, when the first game ball is dropped (dropped) from the recess, the first game ball can be received by the slide member and guided to the second entrance by the slide member. As a result, the first game ball can enter the second entrance.

  In any one of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the changing means is connected to the rolling means to which the game ball passing through the passage member rolls, and is linked to the rolled means so as to be interlocked with the first position. And a second position, and a path changing means for changing a course of a game ball passing through the passage member, wherein the path changing means is displaced to the second position. The path of the ball is a path that is easier to enter the second entrance than the path of the game ball in the state of being displaced to the first position, and the driven means is set to the first number of games. When the ball rolls, the course changing means is displaced to the second position, and a second number of game balls smaller than the first number rolls the rolled means. The game machine E9 is characterized in that the course changing means is displaced to the first position.

  According to the gaming machine E9, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the changing means is linked to the driven means for rolling the game ball passing through the passage member, and the driven means. And a path changing means for changing the course of a game ball passing through the path member, the path changing means being displaced to the second position. The path of the game ball in the state of being played is a path that is easier to enter the second entrance than the path of the game ball in the state of being displaced to the first position. When a number of game balls roll, the course changing means is displaced to the second position, and a second number of game balls less than the first number rolls on the rolled means. Since the course changing means is displaced to the first position, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In other words, when the first number of game balls, which is greater than the second number, flows into the second entrance, than when the second number of game balls flow down. (The ease of entering the second entrance can be changed depending on the number of game balls passing through the passage member), so that the game balls leaked into the entrance to the first entrance Numbers can also draw attention to the player. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine E9, the course changing means is disposed on the downstream side of the driven means.

  According to the gaming machine E10, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E9, the course changing means is disposed downstream of the driven means, so that the course (path) of a predetermined game ball is changed to the predetermined game. It can be related to the number of game balls that follow the ball and the degree of succession, and as a result, the interest of the game can be improved. That is, when the following game balls are connected, the course changing means is maintained at the second position while the number of game balls rolling on the driven means is maintained at the first number. Thus, each game ball that has reached the course changing means can be easily entered into the second entrance, while the series of subsequent game balls is divided, and the number of game balls that roll on the rolling means is reduced. When the number is less than or equal to the second number, the course change means is displaced to the first position, and each game ball that has reached the course change means is described above (when the course change means is displaced to the second position). ) Can be more difficult to enter the second entrance. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the number of game balls to be followed and how they are connected. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In any one of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the changing means includes a rotating member formed to be rotatable, and a magnet that is disposed on the outer surface side of the rotating member and attracts the game ball to the outer surface of the rotating member in a suspended state. And a contact means for contacting the game ball and dropping the game ball from the rotating member by being positioned on a trajectory accompanying the rotation of the rotating member of the game ball attracted to the outer surface of the rotating member by the magnet And the contact means is positioned below the game ball attracted to the outer surface of the rotating member in the gravity direction, and more than the game ball attracted to the outer surface of the rotating member and sent. A gaming machine E11 characterized in that a gaming ball dropped from the rotating member by contact of the contacting means makes it easier for the gaming ball to enter the second entrance.

  According to the gaming machine E11, in addition to the effects exerted by any of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the changing means includes a rotating member formed to be rotatable, and a game ball disposed on the outer surface side of the rotating member. A magnet that is attracted to the outer surface of the rotating member and a game ball that is attracted to the outer surface of the rotating member by the magnet, and is positioned on a trajectory associated with the rotation of the rotating member of the rotating ball. Contact means for dropping off, the contact means is located below the game ball attracted to the outer surface of the rotating member in the direction of gravity, and more than the game ball sucked and sent to the outer surface of the rotating member, Since the game ball dropped from the rotating member by the contact of the contact means is easier to enter the second entrance, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. That is, the case where one or more game balls are further adsorbed to the game ball adsorbed to the outer surface of the rotating member, rather than the case where only one game ball is adsorbed to the outer surface of the rotating member, Since it is easy to enter the second entrance (the ease of entering the second entrance can be changed according to the number of game balls passing through the passage member), the first entrance The number of game balls that have leaked into the ball can be focused on the player. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In particular, according to the gaming machine E11, even when a plurality of game balls are rolled toward the rotating member, when the game balls are connected, the game ball preceding the rotating member is adsorbed. When the following game ball can be easily attracted to the preceding game ball, and at least the following game ball can be easily entered into the second entrance, while the game balls are separated from each other by a predetermined interval. The game ball preceding the rotating member can be adsorbed, but the following game ball cannot be adsorbed by the preceding game ball, and the subsequent game ball is also adsorbed by the rotating member. That is, both the preceding and following are made difficult to enter the second entrance. Therefore, not only the number of game balls but also the state of the connection can be focused on the player. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, according to the gaming machine E11, the game ball is attracted to the outer surface of the rotating member in a suspended state, and the game ball is sent with the rotation of the rotating member in the suspended state. A form in which the game ball drops off from the rotating member can be formed as an unstable state of swinging and swinging due to variations in rolling direction, suction position, and the like. That is, even when only one game ball is attracted to the rotating member (when it is not abutted against the abutment means), the game ball is dropped and easily enters the second entrance. It can be performed.

  In the gaming machine E11, the contact means is formed in a tapered flat plate shape, a first game ball that is attracted to the outer surface of the rotating member, and a second game ball that is attracted to the first game ball. The gaming machine E12 is arranged in a substantially horizontal posture at a height position where the tip is inserted at a suction position between the two.

  According to the gaming machine E12, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E11, the contact means is formed in a tapered flat plate shape and is attached to the first gaming ball that is attracted to the outer surface of the rotating member, and the first gaming ball. The first game ball is adsorbed on the outer surface of the rotating member because it is disposed in a substantially horizontal posture at the height position where the tip is inserted at the adsorption position between the second game ball and the adsorbed second game ball. When the second game ball is adsorbed to the first game ball, the adsorption of the first game ball and the second game ball is smoothly released, and only the second game ball is dropped. In the case where only the first game ball is attracted to the outer surface of the rotating member, the contact of the first game ball is suppressed by suppressing the contact means from acting on the first game ball. Can be easily maintained. Therefore, when only one game ball is attracted and suspended by the rotating member, and when two or more game balls are attracted by the rotating member and continuously suspended, the second entrance is entered. The difference in easiness of balls can be made clearer. Thereby, it is possible to make the player pay more attention to the number of game balls and their series. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Concept of Invention with Variable Unit 360 as an Example>
A rotation member having a substantially cylindrical shape that is formed to be rotatable in a posture in which a rotation axis is directed in a horizontal direction, and a magnet that is disposed on the rotation member and attracts a game ball to an outer peripheral surface of the rotation member; In the gaming machine that sends the adsorbed game ball in the rotation direction of the rotating member by rotating the rotating member with the game ball adsorbed on the surface, the magnet of the rotating member is first When the second game ball is magnetically attached to the first game ball while the game ball is adsorbed, the release means makes it easier to release the adsorption between the magnet of the rotating member and the first game ball A gaming machine F1 comprising:

  Here, a substantially cylindrical rotating member that is formed to be rotatable in a posture in which the rotation axis is directed in the horizontal direction, and a magnet that is disposed on the rotating member and attracts the game ball to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member, A gaming machine is known in which a rotating ball is rotated in a state in which a gaming ball is adsorbed on an outer peripheral surface, thereby sending the gaming ball in the rotation direction of the rotating member (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-231890). Publication). In this case, when two game balls are rolled continuously toward the rotating member, the preceding game ball (first game ball) is adsorbed to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member, and the preceding game ball. When the following game ball (second game ball) is adsorbed to the (first game ball), both the preceding game ball and the following game ball are sent in the rotation direction of the rotating member. However, in such a gaming machine, there is a problem that it is not possible to sufficiently give the player interest in gaming.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F1, when the first game ball is attracted to the magnet of the rotating member and the second game ball is magnetized to the first game ball, Since the release means for easily releasing the adsorption with the first game ball is provided, it is possible to suppress both of the first game ball and the second game ball from being sent in the rotation direction of the rotating member.

  That is, when only the first game ball is rolled toward the rotating member and is attracted to the outer peripheral surface (magnet) of the rotating member, the first game ball can be sent in the rotating direction of the rotating member. In addition to the first game ball, the second game ball is also rolled toward the rotation member, and the first game ball is attracted to the outer peripheral surface (magnet) of the rotation member and the first game ball is moved to the first game ball. When the two game balls are adsorbed, both the first game ball and the second game ball can be prevented from being sent in the rotation direction of the rotation member, so that the first game ball is directed to the rotation member. When rolling, the player can be concerned about whether another game ball (that is, the second game ball) has rolled behind the first game ball. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine F1, the first entrance into which a game ball attracted to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member and sent in the rotation direction of the rotating member enters and the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member was not attracted. A second entrance for a game ball to enter, and at least the game entrance to the first entrance is provided with a benefit to the player, or to the first entrance A gaming machine F2 characterized in that the profit given to the player by entering the ball is higher than the profit given to the player by entering the second entrance.

  According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F1, the first entrance port into which the gaming ball attracted to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member and sent in the rotating direction of the rotating member enters, and the rotating member And a second entrance into which a game ball that has not been attracted to the outer peripheral surface of the first entrance is provided, and if the game ball enters at least the first entrance, a profit is given to the player, or Since the profit given to the player by entering the first entrance is higher than the profit given to the player by entering the second entrance, improving the interest of the game Can be achieved.

  That is, the player expects to obtain a profit by entering the first entrance or higher profit than the case of entering the second entrance. In the hope that it will be attracted to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member and sent in the direction of rotation of the rotating member, and in the hope that more opportunities will be given to profit, more game balls will be placed on the outer periphery of the rotating member. The ball is desired to be attracted to the surface and sent in the direction of rotation of the rotating member. On the other hand, when only the first game ball is adsorbed on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member, the first game ball can be sent in the rotation direction (first entrance) of the rotating member, When the second game ball is adsorbed to the first game ball adsorbed on the outer peripheral surface of the rotation member, not only the second game ball but also the first game ball is moved in the rotation direction of the rotation member. The ball is not sent, and the opportunity to enter the first entrance from both sides is lost. Therefore, when the first game ball rolls toward the rotating member, it is determined whether another game ball (that is, the second game ball) has been rolled behind the first game ball. It is possible to make it easy for a person to be concerned (exciting), and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, as a form with a high profit given to the player, a form in which a lot of prize balls are paid out upon entering the ball, a form that can be opened and closed, and allowing / restricting the entrance to the third entrance through the opening and closing Examples include a mode in which the opening time of the movable blade piece is lengthened, a mode in which the number of times of opening the movable blade piece is increased, and a mode in which the opening range of the movable blade piece is increased.

  In the gaming machine F1 or F2, the release means includes a displacement member that is displaceably disposed on the rotating member, and the displacement member is attached to the second game ball that is attracted to the first game ball. A gaming machine F3, which is displaced by being brought into contact with it and expands a distance between the first game ball and the magnet by the displacement.

  According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F1 or F2, the release means includes a displacement member that is displaceably disposed on the rotating member, and the displacement member is attracted to the first game ball. Since the displacement is caused by contact with the second game ball and the distance between the first game ball and the magnet is increased by the displacement, the second game ball is attracted to the first game ball. If the weight of the second game ball is used, the adsorption of the magnet and the first game ball is released while the second game ball is adsorbed to the first game ball. If not, the adsorption between the magnet and the first game ball can be prevented from being released. In addition, since such switching is performed using the weight of the second game ball, it is not necessary to provide a drive source for displacing the displacement member, thereby reducing the product cost accordingly. Can do.

  In addition, as a form in which the distance between the first game ball and the magnet is increased by the displacement of the displacement member, a form in which only the first game ball is displaced, a form in which only the magnet is displaced, or the first game Either of a form in which both the sphere and the magnet are displaced may be used.

  In the gaming machine F1 or F2, the release means is formed as a recess that is recessed in the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member and receives the second game ball adsorbed by the first game ball. Game machine F4 to do.

  According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F1 or F2, the release means is a recessed portion that is recessed in the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member and receives the second gaming ball adsorbed by the first gaming ball. Since the first game ball is formed, the second game ball can be brought closer to the lower side in the gravity direction of the first game ball, and the gravity of the weight of the second game ball acting on the first game ball is correspondingly increased. It is easy to increase the direction component. Therefore, it is possible to easily release the adsorption between the first game ball and the magnet.

  That is, when the second game ball is attracted to the first game ball, the weight of the second game ball is used to cancel the adsorption of the magnet and the first game ball. When the second game ball is not attracted to the first game ball, the adsorption of the magnet and the first game ball can be prevented from being released. In addition, since such switching is only required by a concave portion provided in the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member as a means for utilizing the weight of the second game ball, it is not necessary to provide a displacement member or a driving source. Therefore, the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

  One of the gaming machines A1 to A11, B1 to B8, C1 to C7, D1 to D13, E1 to 12, and F1 to F4, the gaming machine is a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “equipped with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, examples of the game media include coins and medals.

  A gaming machine K2, wherein in any one of the gaming machines A1 to A11, B1 to B8, C1 to C7, D1 to D13, E1 to 12, and F1 to F4, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and a ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in an operation port disposed at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner so that a ball can be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is obtained. Examples include those to which values (including data written on magnetic cards as well as premium balls) are given.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A11, B1 to B8, C1 to C7, D1 to D13, E1 to 12, and F1 to F4, the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. A gaming machine K3. Among them, the basic configuration of the merged gaming machine includes “a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the operation of the identification information, the change of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. Special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stoppage is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, and the identification information The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state occurs.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
13 Game board 26 Left start winning entrance (first entrance)
27 Right start winning entrance (first entrance)
331a Receiving part (rolling member)
352 Variable plate (displacement member)
352d1 bulging part (thick part)
353d First irregular reflection portion (first transmission member)
353f Standing part (connection member)
354b Second irregular reflection part (second transmission member)
355 Light Emitting Member (Base Member)
355a LED (light emitting means)
369 Stopper (blocking means)
370L, 2370L, 3370L, 4370L, 5370L Rotating body (rotating member)
370R, 2370R, 3370R, 4370R, 5370R Rotating body (Rotating member)
372Rb, 2372Rb Magnet 372Lc2, 2372Lc, 3372Lc, 5372Lc Groove (recess)
372Rc2, 2372Rc, 3372Rc, 5372Rc Groove (recess)
4372Rc5 Concave portion (concave portion)
5372Rd, 5372Ld Release member (displacement member)
373Ra, 373La recovery port (second entrance)
381c 2nd rolling part (rolling surface)
381d Third rolling part (receiving part)
2381g Dividing wall 382 V winning member (first entrance)
613a Guide plate (bottom surface)
613a1 Contact surface 613a2 Rolling surface (feeding surface)
7613e Through hole (concave)
631b Second through hole (first opening)
632a Through hole (second entrance)
632b Connecting hole (second opening)
633b Second through hole (first opening)
640, 8640, 9640, 11640 Path member (passage member)
10642a Tip (contact member)
8644a Variable plate (rolling means)
8644c Restriction member (course changing means)
652 Variable plate (sliding member)
11652a Concave part (guide part)
655 solenoid (drive means)
SE1 sensor device (detection member)

Claims (3)

In a gaming machine provided with a displacement member that is displaceably disposed at a position visible from a player and switches a flow path of a game ball according to the displacement position,
A substrate member on which one or a plurality of light emitting means formed to emit light is mounted with the light emitting surface facing the front side;
A first transmissive member and a second transmissive member disposed on the front side of the substrate member and formed of a light transmissive material;
The displacement member is formed of a light transmissive material and disposed on the front side of the second transmission member;
A gaming machine, wherein a distance between the second transmission member and the board member is set to a different distance from a distance between the first transmission member and the board member.   The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the first transmissive member and the second transmissive member are provided with irregularities on at least one of a front surface and a back surface.   The gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein the unevenness formed on the first transmitting member and the unevenness formed on the second transmitting member are substantially the same.

Images